HARDEE'S  BKXE  ABE 


w* 


J 


George  Washington  Flowers 
Memorial  Collection 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 


ESTABLISHED  BY  THE 

FAMILY  OF 

COLONEL  FLOWERS 


I 


r*~in* 


fj  r 


1tt*rd. 


ri++* 


*  < 


>* 


fbafa^  <a& 


do  a  . 


*  - 

<  - 

m  ■ 

y*? 

^,Ar^ 

.,<,-/ 

■ 

B 

O  /»«"■ 

i 


SY&t       f'rf/ 


THE    ONLY    COPY-RIGHT 


RIFLE 


AND 


INFANTRY  TACTICS, 


REVISED  AND   IMPROVED 


BY 


COL.  W.  J.  HARDEE,  C.  S.  ARMY, 


SECOND  EDITION. 
* 


\ 

VOL.  I. 

SCHOOLS  OF  THE  SOLDIER  AND  COMPANY 
INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


MOBILE: 

S.    II.    GOETZEL    &    CO. 

FIUST  YF.Ai:  OF  THE  CONFEDERACY. 


*w 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861,  by 

S.  H.  GOETZEL  &  CO. 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Alabama,  for  the  Confederate 
States  of  America. 


V 


RIFLE  AND  INFANTRY  TACTIC^ 


TITLE     FIRS  T . 


ARTICLE   FIRST. 
Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line. 

1.  A  regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which  will  habitually  be 

posted  from   right  to  left,  in  the  following  order:  first,  sixth,  fourth',  ninth, 
third,  eighth,  fifrh,  tenth,  seventh,   second,  according  to  the  rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  principle  will  be  observed, 
viz  :  the  first  captain  will  command  the  right  company,  the  second  captain  the 
left  company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre  company,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from  right  to  left,  first 
company,  second  company,  &.c.  This  designation  will  be  observed  in  the 
manoeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their  denomination,  will 
form  the  first  division  ;  the  next  two  companies  the  second  division  ;  and  soon, 
to  the  left 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  which  will  be 
designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon,  counting  from  the  right ;  and  each 
platoon,  in  like  manner,  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or  part  of  a  regiment, 
composed  of  two  or  more  companies,  will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  designated,  will  be  posted  on 
the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion  company.  That  company,  and  all  on  its 
right,  will  be  denominated  the  right  zcing  of  the  battalion;*  the  remaining 
companies  the  left  wing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks;  and  each  .company  will 
be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  following  manner:  the  corpora's  will  be 
posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons,  according  to 
height;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tallest  man  will  form  the  first  tile,  the 
next  two  tallest  men  will  form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  tile,  which 
will  be  composed  of  the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the  company,  from 
right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men,  who  will  be  designated  comrades 
in  battle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  be  thirteen  inches, 
measured  from  the  breasts  of  the  rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of 
the  front  rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion  will  always  be  equal- 
ized, by  transferring  men  from  the  strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 

Posts  of  Company  Officers,  Sergeants  and  Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in  number,  and  will  he 
posted  in  the  following  manner  : 

IS.     The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touching  with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with  the  left  elbow,  and 
covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  denominated  covering 
sergeant,  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  posted  as  file  closers,  and 
two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 


iTION    OF    THE    BATTALION. 


6nant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  fourth  section. 
,~,ia  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon, 
rue  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  com- 
pany.   Li  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  second 
platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  first 
platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  first 
platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion,  the  second  sergeant  will 
be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  as  prescribed  No.  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — officers  by  sergeants, 
and  sergeants  by  corporals.  The  Colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from 
one  company  to  command  another,  of  which  both  the  captain  and  first  lieuten- 
ant are  absent  ;•  but  this  authority  will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand 
to  be  so  detacher. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff . 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  are  supposed 
to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adjutant, 
when  the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  and 
opposite  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  This  distance  will  be  reduced  whenever 
there  is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  opposite  the  centres  of 
the  right  and  left  wings  respectively,  and  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  opposite  the  right  and  left  of 
the  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major,  respectively,  in  the  manoeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  and 
the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all  the  field  officers  "be  absent,  the  senior  captain 
will  command  the  battalion  ;  but  if  either  be  present,  he  will  not  call  the 
senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer,  except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  officers,  in  one  rank,  on 
the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank  of  the  field 
music,  and  two  paces  on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and  posted  twelve  paces 
in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  com- 
pany. The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in  front  of  the  field 
music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in  the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn  up  in  two  or  four 
ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  mu- 
sic, having  one  of  the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

3G.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed  of  eight  corporals, 
and  p<  sted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the 
time  being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 


INSTRUCTION    OF    THE'BATT. 


37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant,  ™Jfc^ 
lonel,  who  will  be  called,  for  the  time,  color-bearer,  with  the 
rporals,  respectively,  on  his  right  and  left ;  the  rear  rank  will  be   compos 


of  fhe  three  corporals  next  in  rank;  and  the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be 
posted  in  their  rear,  and  on  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of  the  culm-. 
company,  when  these  three  last  named  corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file  closers, 
will  be  'immediately  on  their  left. 

88.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  present,  there  will  be  no 
color-guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  except  it  maybe  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  he  selected  from  those  most  dis- 
tinguished for  regularity  and  precision,  as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as 
in  their  marching.  The  latter  advantage,  and  a  just  carriage  of  the  person, 
are  to  be  more  particularly  sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-beaver. 

General  Guides. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion,  selected,  for  the 
time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among  the  Bergeants  (other  than  first  sergeant)  the 
most  distinguished  for  carriage  under  arms,  ami  accuracy  in  inarching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denominated,  in  the  manoeuvres, 
right  general  guide,  and  left  general  guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file 
closers  ;  the  first  in  rear  of  the  light,  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the  left  flank 
of  the  battalion.  *    • 

ARTICLE   SECOND* 

Instruction   of  the    Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  his  com- 
mand. He  will  assemble  the  officers  together  for  theoretical  and  practical  in- 
struction as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary,  and  when  unable  to  attend  to 
this  duty  in  person,  it  will  be  discharged  by  the  officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  practical  in- 
struction of  their  non-commissioned  officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  the  non-commissioned  staff.  To  this  end.  they  will  require  these  tac- 
tics to  be  studied  and  recited  lesson  by  lesson  ;  and  when  instruction  is  given 
on  the  ground,  each  non-commissioned  officer,  as  he  explains  a  movement, 
should  be  required  to  put  it  into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be  practised  in  giving  com- 
mands. Each  command,  in  a  lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction,  should  first 
be  given  by  the  instructor,  and  then  repeated,  in  succession,  by  the  non-com- 
missioned  officers,  so  that  while  they  become  habituated  to  the  commands, 
uniformity  may  be  established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers  will  be  the  instruc- 
tors of  the  squads ;  but  if  there  be  not  a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers 
present,  intelligent  sergeants  may  be  substituted  ;  and  two  or  three  squads, 
under  sergeant  instructors,  be  superintended,  at  the  same  time,  by  an  office,-. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major,  un- 
der the  colonel,  will  be  the  principal  instructors,  substituting  frequently  the 
captain  of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one  of  the  lieutenants  ;  the  substitute, 
as  far  as  practicable,  being  superintended  by  one  of  the  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier  general  may  constitute 
himself  the  principal  instructor,  frequently  substituting  the  colonel  of  the 
battalion,  sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  and  twice  or  thrice,  in 
the  same  course  of  instruction,  each  of  the  three  senior  captains.  In  this 
school,  also,  the  substitute  will  always,  if  practicable,  be  superintended  by 
the  brigadier  general  or  the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of  a  captain  being  the  instruc- 
tor), by  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major. 


TIOIV    OF    THE    BATTALION'. 


instruction  being  tbe  basis  of  the  instruction  of  companies, 
of  the  regiment  depends,   and  the  first  principles  having  the 
.luerice  upon  this  individual  instruction,  classes  of  recruits  should 
be  watched  with  the  greatest  care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  precise  words,  the  move- 
ment to  be  executed  ;  and  not  to  overburden  the  memory  of  the  men,  they 
will  always  use  the  same  terms  to  explain  the  same  principles. 

50.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precept,  should  keep  up  the  atten- 
tion of  the  men  by  an  animated  tone,  and  pass  rapidly  from  one  movement  to 
another,  as  suou  as  that  which  they  command  has  been  executed  in  a  satisfac- 
tory manner 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when  required  to  be  used 
either  for  attack  or  defence  ;  the  exercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be  executed 
without  the  bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  to  be  fixed,  the  chief  of 
the  battalion  will  cause  the  signal  to  Jix  bayonet  to  be  sounded  ;  at  this  signal 
the  men  will  fix  bayonets  without  command,  and  immediately  replace  their 
pieces  in  the  position  they  were  before  the  signal. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

53.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected  only  by  joining  theory  to 
practice.  The  colonel  will  often  practice  them  in  inarching  and  in  estimating 
distances,  and  he  will  carefully  endeavor  to  cause  them  to  take  steps  equal  in 
length  and  swiftness.     They  will  also  be  exercised  in  the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the  Titles  in  this  system  of 
drill,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  acquainted  with  the  bugle 
signals  :  and  should,  by  practice,  be  enabled,  if  necessary,  to  sound  them. 
This  knowledge,  so  necessary  in  general  instruction,  becomes  of  vital  impor- 
tance on  actual  service  in  the  field. 

Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  company  materially  depend  on  the 
conduct  and  character  of  its  sergeants,  they  should  be  selected  with  care,  and 
properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  appertaining  to  their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
the  School  of  the  Company,  and  the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should  like- 
wise know  all  the  details  of  service,  and  the  regulations  prescribing  their  du- 
ties in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his  company  those  whom  he 
judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few  privates,  who  may  be  ad- 
mitted to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals  is  intended  principally  to 
qualify  them  for  the  instruction  of  the  privates,  they  should  be  taught  not  only 
to  execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly,  every  thing  they  may  be  required  to 
teach. 

Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  of  caution,  which  is  attention. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIL 


manual  of 


63.  •  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  the   u 
be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or  halt,  or,  in  the 
arms,  the  part  of  command  which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness 
proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at  the  top  of  the  voice,  dwelling 
on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced  in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory  commands  are  herein 
distinguished  by  italics,  those  of  execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their  length,  are  difficult  to 
be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be  divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with  an  as- 
cending progression  in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in  such  a  manner  that 
the  tone  of  execution  may  be  more  energetic  and  elevated  ;  the  divisions 
are  indicated  by  a  hyphen.  The  parts  of  commands  which  are  placed  in  a 
parenthesis,  are  not  pronounced. 


TITLE    SECOND. 
SCHOOL    OF     THE     SOLDIER. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual  and  progressive  instruc- 
tion of  the  recruits,  the  instructor  never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed 
until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it ;  and  he  executes,  himself,  the 
movement  which  he  commands,  so  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  He  accus- 
toms the  recruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  explained — teaches 
him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that 
all  the  movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before  passing  to  another.  Af- 
ter they  have  been  properly  executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  ea<  j  lesson, 
tli«- instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order;  on  the  contrary, he 
should  change  ir,  that  he  may  judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the"  men  to  rest  at  the  end  of  each  p.  1 1  of  the 
lessons,  and  oftner,  if  he  thinks  proper,  especially  at  the  commencen  eut  :  fbx 
this  purpose  he  commands  Kest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer  required  to  preserve 
immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his  place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  re- 
lieve the  attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place — Best:  the  % 

is  then  not  required  to  preserve   his  immobility,  but  he  always  keeps  one  of 
his  feet  in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the  instruction,  he  com- 
mands— Attention  ;  at  this  command,  the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains 
motiouless,  and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  three  parts:  the  first, 
comprehending  what  ought  to  be  taught  to  recruits  without  arms:  the  second, 
the  manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings  ;  the  third,  the  principles  of  align- 
ment, the  march  by  the  front,  the  different  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the 
principles  of  wheeling,  and  those  of  change  of  direction  ;  also,  long  marches 
in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 


THE    SOLDIER PART    I. 


je  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows  : 

PART    FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the    soldier  without  arms:      Eves  right,  left  and 
front. 

Lrsso)i  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common  and  quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  direct   step  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run  . 

PART   SECOND. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms. 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and  by  rank. 

-Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  <>.  Bayonet  exorcise. 

PART  THIRD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruction  in  the  principles 
of  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march,  and  the  different  steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of  direction. 

Lesson  5.  Long  inarches  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  run,  with  arms  and 
knapsacks. 


PART  FIRST. 


77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  recruit  at  a  time  ;  but  three 
or  four  may  be  united,  when  the  number  be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the 
instructors.  In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed  in  a  single  rank,  at  one 
pace  from  each  other.     In  this  part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. 


Position  of  the  Soldier. 


78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the  conformation  of  the 
man  will  permit ; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each  other  something  less 
than  a  right  angle  ; 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness  ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward  ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the 
seam  of  the  pantaloons; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  constraint ;  v 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking  the  ground  about  the  dis- 
tance of  fifteen  paces. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER F 


Remarks  on  the.  position  of  the  so. 

Heels  on  the  same  line; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  tbe  other,  the  shoulder  on  that  side 
would  be  thrown  back,  or  the  position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  legs  with  large  calves, 
cannot,  without  constraint,  make  their  heels  touch  while  standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an  angle; 

Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than  the  other,  a  shoulder  would 
be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet  be  too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practi- 
cable to  incline  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  without  rendering  the 
whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extended  icithout  stiffness; 
Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be  unavoidable. 
The  body  erect  on  the  hips  ; 

Because, it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The  instructor  will  observe 
that  many  recruits  have  the  bad  habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a 
side,  or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right,  when  underarms.  These 
are  defects  he  will  labor  to  correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  inclining  foricard; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the  reverse,  to  project  the 
belly,  and  to  throw  back  the  shoulders,  when  tbey  wish  to  hold  themselves 
erect,  from  which  result  great  inconveniences  in  marching.  The  habit  of  in- 
clining forward  the  upper  part  of  the  body  is  so  important  to  contract,  that 
the  instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the  beginning,  particularly  with  recruits  who 
have  naturally  the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  Square  ; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line  of  the  breast,  and 
the  back  arched  (the  defect  called  round-shouldered,  not  uncommon  among 
recruits),  the  man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his  piece  with  address.  It  is 
important,  then,  to  correct  this  defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that  "he  coat 
should  set  easy  about  the  shoulders  and  arm-pits  ;  but  in  correcting  this  defect, 
the  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  much  to  the 
rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  aud  the  small  of  the  back  to  be 
curved. 

The  arms  hanging  naturally,  clboics  near  the  body,  the  palm  of  the  hand  a  little 
turned  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons ; 

Because,  these  positions  are  equally  important  to  the  shoulder-arms,  and  to 
prevent  the  man  from  occupying  more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  neces:-  ry  to  a 
free  use  of  the  piece ;  they  have,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  keeping  iu  the 
shoulders. 


.    OF    THE    SOLDIER    PART    I. 


...might  to  the  front,  and  without  constraint , 


,  if  their  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position,   it  would  communicate 
tsell  r».  the  whole  of  the  upper  part  of  the   body,  embarrass  its  movements, 
i  gfve  pain  and  fatigue. 


..  n 


Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining  the  shoulders  in  line — an 
essential  object,  to  be  insisted  on  and  attained. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He  will 
command: 

J.  Eyes— Right.    2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  tight,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head  gently,  so  as  to  bring 
the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the  eyes 
fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the  same 
rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume  the  direct  or  habitual 
position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the  movement  of  the  head 
does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if  the 
movement  of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

85.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit  to  pass  from  the  state  of 
attention  to  that  of  ease,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

80.  To  cause  a.  resumption  of  the  habitual  position,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  attention  ;  at  the  second,  he 
will  resume  the  prescribed  position  and  steadiness. 

Lesson  II. 

Facings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed  in  one  time,  or  pause. 
The  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Squad.    2.  Right  (or  left)— Face. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,  turn  on  the  left 
heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little,  and  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  , 
left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  for  front)  will  be  executed  in  two  times,  or 
pauses.    The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  About — Face. 

91 .  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit  will  turn  on  the  left  heel, 
bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  op- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART 

posite  to,  and  fall  three  inches  from,  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square  to  each 
other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word  face,  the  recruit  will  turn  on  both  heel*; 
raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend  the  hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these  motions  do  not  derange  the 
position  of  the  body. 

Lesson  III. 

Principles  of  the  direct  step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  common  time,  will  be  twenty- 
eight  inches,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of 
ninety  in  a  minute. 

95.'  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  his  position,  will  explain 
to  him  the  principle  and  mechanism  of  this  step — placing  himself  six  or  seven 
paces  from,  and  lacing  to,  the  recruit.  He  will  himself  execute  slowly  the 
step  in  the  way  of  illustration,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.   Common  time. 

:*>.  March. 

9C).  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of  the  body 
on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the  left  kuee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but  without  a  jerk,  carry 
straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near 
the  ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed,  and,  as  also,  the  kner, 
slightly  turned  out;  he  will,  at  the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body 
forward,  and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  the  distance 
where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought 
forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot.  The  recruit 
will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above,  the 
heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to 
march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or  striking  the  one  against  the  other,  without 
turning  the  shoulders,  and  preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  trout. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  when 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up, 
and  planted  by  the  side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time,  to  the  recruit,  the 
cadence  of  the  step  by  giving  the  command  one  at  the  instant  of  raising  a  foot, 
and  two  at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing  a  cadence  of  ninety 
steps  in  a  minute.  This  method  will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the 
mind  the  two  motions  into  which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the  first  and  second  parts  of 
the  School  of  the  Soldier.  As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has 
become  established  in  the  principles  of  shouldered  arms,  and  in  the  mechan- 
ism, length  and  swiftness  of  the  step  in  common  time,  he  will  be  practised 
only  in  quick  time,  the  double  quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the  same  as  for  common 
time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per 
minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick  time,  will  command: 

1.  Squad,  forward.    2.  March. 


J 


JL    OF    THE    SOLDIER — PART    1. 


Lesson  IV. 

Principles  of  the  Double   Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty-three  inches,  and  its 
swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits  the  principles  and 
mechanism  of  the  double  quick  step,  will  command : 

1.   Double  quick  Step.     2.  MARCH. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise  his  hands  to  a  level  with 
his  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  .second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front  his  left  leg  bent,  in 
order  to  give  to  the  knee  the  greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between 
the  knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed;  he  will  then  replace  his 
foot  in  its  former  position  ;  with  the  right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  be 
continued  until  the  command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the  foot  which  is 
raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and  dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands  by 
his  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces  from,  and  facing 
the  recruit,  will  indicate  the  cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  two,  given 
alternately  at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be  brought  to  the  ground,  which  at 
first  will  be  in  common  time,  but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  the  principles  of  this 
step,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1 .  Squad,  forward.    2.  Doidrte  Quick.     3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of  his  body 
on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his  arms  as  indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forwai-d  the  left  foot,  the  leg 
slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised — will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first, 
thirty-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right  foot  will  then  execute 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the 
legs  will  take  place  by  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is 
planted,  and  by  allowing  a  natural,  oscilatory  motion  to  the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  different  degrees  of 
swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances  the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  in- 
creased to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate  a  distance  of 
four  thousand  yards  would  be  passed  over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick  step,  the  only 
difference  consisting  in  a  greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick  time,  or  the  run,  thnt 
the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the 
mouth  closed.  Experience  has  proved  that,  by  conforming  to  this  principle,  a 
man  can  pass  over  a  much  longer  distance,  and  with  less  fatigue. 


2$. 


__J£JL, 


I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  15 


PART  SECOND. 

GENERAL   RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this  second  part  until  they 
shall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of 
marching  at  the  different  steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will  place  in  the  same  rank, 
elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  as 
follows: 

Lesson  I. 

Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being;  placed  as  explained  in  the  first  lesson  of  the  first 
part,  the  instructor  will  cause  him  to  bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  place 
the  piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner : 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand— the  barrel  nearly  vertical  and  resting  in 
the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — the  guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  oearly  at 
its  full  length  near  the  body:  tin1  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard, 
the  remaining  fingers  closed  together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just 
under  the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

1 2-2.  Recruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects  in  the  conformation 
of  the  shoulders,  breast  and  hips.  These  the  instructor  will  labor  to  correct 
in  the  lessons  without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by  Bteady  endeavors,  so  that  the 
appearance  of  the  pieces,  in  the  same  line,  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without 
constraint  to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark  that  recruits,  on  first 
bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  derange  their  position  by  lowering  the  right  shoul- 
der and  the  right  hand,  or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spreading  out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by  continually  rectifying 
the  position ;  he  will  sometimes  take  away  the  piece  to  replace  it  the  better  ; 
he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in  the  beginning,  but  labor  by  de- 
grees to  render  this  position  so  natural  and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a 
long  time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that  the  piece  at  the  shoul- 
der, be  not  carried  too  high  nor  too  low;  if  too  high,  the  right  elbow  would 
spread  out,  the*  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in  his  rank,  and  the 
piece  be  made  to  waver;  if  too  low,  the  files  would  be  too  much  closed,  the 
soldier  would  not  have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  piece  with  facility, 
the  right  arm  would  become  too  much  fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the 
shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second  lesson,  will  cause  to  be 
repeated  the  movements  of  eyes  right,  left,  and  front,  and  the  facings. 

Lesson   II. 

Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four  men,  placed,  at  first,  in 
one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow  and  afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time  (or  pause),  but  this 
time  will  be  divided  into  motions,  the  better  to  make  kuown  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  with 
the  exceptions  herein  indicated,  is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute; 
but,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instructor,  will  at  first,  look 


16  SCHOOL  OF  THR  SOLDIER PART  II. 


more  particularly  to  the  execution  of  the  motions,  without  requiring  a  nice 
observance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the  recruits  progressively, 
and  after  they  shalt  have  become  a  little  familiarized  with  the  handling  of  the 
piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the  rammer,  and  to  the 
fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed, 
nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be  subjected  to  that  cadence, 
The  instructor  will,  however,  labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed 
witli  promptness,  and  above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of 
the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or  pause).  The  commands  two,  three,  and  four, 
will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As  soon  as  the  recruits 
shall  well  comprehend  the  positions  of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they 
will  be  taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its  different  motions; 
the  mechanism  of  the  time  will  nevertheless  be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a 
perfect  use  of  the  piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slurring  over,  either  of 
the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following  progression:  The 
instructor  will  command: 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

133.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear;  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  baud,  raise  this  hand  as  high  as  the  chin,  and 
seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  four  inches  below  the 
cock. 

134.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  barrel  to 
the  front;  carry  the  piece  to  the  lelt  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  entended 
on  the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock;  support  the  cock  against 
the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  right  breast. 

135.  (Third  motion.)    Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

136.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  position,  he  will 
command : 

Rest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up  smartly  the  right  hand 
to  the  handle  of  the  piece  (small  of  the  stock),  when  they  will  not  be  required 
to  preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from  this  position 
to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command: 

1.  Attention.     2.  SQUAD. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  support  arms. 

Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

140.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  under  and 
against  the  left  fore-arm ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the 


31 


JL±. 


■ 


m 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  17 


thumb  extended ;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm 
along  the  stock. 

141.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the  right  shoulder 
with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right 
hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  the  left 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right 
arm  nearly  straight. 

142.  (Third  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Present— Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

143.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  the  piece  erect  before 
the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  rhe  same  time  seize  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide  Bight  and  lower  band, the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizon- 
tal and  resting  against  the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

144.  (Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  "the  stock  with  the  right  hand 
below  and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder— Aums. 

One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

J 45.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same 
time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with 
the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder, 
the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  (Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Order-  Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

147.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  near  the 
upper  band,  and  detach  it  slightl]  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand: 
loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the  left,  re-seize  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand  above  the  lower  band,  the  little  finger  iu  rear  of 
the  barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  sup- 
ported against  the  hip,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

148.  (Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be  de- 
scribed. 

Position  of  order  arms. 

14'.).  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  extended 
along  the  stock;  the  other  fingers  extended  and  joined;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  right  shoulder;  the  rammer  in  front;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the 
butt  against,  and  in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpen- 
dicular. 

150.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  position,  he  will 
command : 

Kest. 


18  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 


151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  silence 
or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from  this  position 
to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  SQUAD. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of  order 
arms. 

Shoulder — ARMS. 

One  time  and   two   motions. 

154.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the 
body ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and  drop  quickly 
the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and 
fore-finger  embracing  the  guard  ;  press  the  piece  against  the  shoulder  with 
the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

155.  (Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

1.  Load* 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

156.  (First  motion.)     Same  as  first  position  of  present  arms,  No.  143. 
(Second  motion.)     Carry  the  piece  to  the  left  side  with  the  left  hand,  butt 

upon  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  front,  piece  inclined  to  the  right  and  front  rest- 
ing along  the  left  thigh,  muzzle  six  inches  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body, 
right  hand  grasping  the  piece  just  below  the  upper  baud,  and  the  left  hand 
extended  upon  the  piece. 

( Third  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  muzzle,  and  car- 
ry the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box-. 

2.  Handle— CARTRIDGE. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two  fingers,  and  place  it 
between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridge  upright  between  the 
thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  near  the  top ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of 
and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

• 

*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the  front. 


as 

r 

I 

— 

kk 

■ 

i 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  19 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Enter  the  powder  into  the  barrel;  disengage  the  ball  from  the  paper 
with  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  ofthe  left ;  insert  it  into 
the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down  with  the  right  thumb  : 
seize  the  head  of  the  rammer  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right 
hand,  the  other  fingers  closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Druir — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  (First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by  extending  the  right  arm  : 
steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb ;  seize  the  rammer  between 
the  thumb  and  fore-finger  ofthe  right  hand,  the  thumb  under  and  finger  over 
the  rammer,  fingers  extended,  palm  ofthe  hand  to  the  front. 

161.  (Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by  extending 
the  arm ;  the  rammer  in  prolongation  of  the  pipes ;  palm  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

162.  (Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer  by  closing  the  fingers,  the  little 
end  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front  ; 
steady  it  by  extending  the  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand  ;  place  the  head  of  the 
rammer  on  the  ball,  the  rammer  in  prolongation  ofthe  barrel. 

6.  Ram— Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and  steady  it  in  this  position 
with  the  thumb  ofthe  left  hand  ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small  end  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front ; 
press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

7.  Return — RAMMER. 
One  time  and  Ihree  motions. 


164.  (First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  half-way  out,  and  steady  it  in  this 
position  with  the  left  thumb  ;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand, 
the  thumb  under  and  the  fore-finger  above  the  rammer,  the  fingers  extended  ; 
clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extending  the  arm,  the  palm  to  the  front, 
the  rammer  in  the  prolongation  ofthe  barrel. 

165.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head  passing  near  the  left 
shoulder,  the  fingers  closed;  the  rammer  held  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, nails  to  the  front;  insert  the  rammer  until  the  hand  reaches  themuzzle. 

166.  (Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by  placing  the  little  finger 
of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  ofthe  rammer;  extend  the  left  hand  down  the 
piece  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 


20  SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    II. 


8.  Prime* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  band  raise  the  piece  till  the  hand  is  as 
high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand ;  half  face  to 
the  right;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles 
with  the  left ;  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left 
hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against 
the  body;  bring  the  piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore-arm — 
the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast, 
the  barrel  upwards,  the  muzzle  on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  the 
fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and  the  small  of  the  stock — remove  the 
old  cap  with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and 
fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple, 
and  press  it  down  with  the  thumb  ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  * 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

169.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder  and  support  it 
there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  front ;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of 
and  on  a  line  with  the  left ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indicated  in 
the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

170.  (Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Ready. 
One  time  and.  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand,  making 
a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  and 
place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it  opposite  to  and  against  the 
left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder. 

172.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
upwards,  the  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right 
fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches  below  the 
right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side  ; 
place  at  the  same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock,  the  other  fin- 
gers under  and  against  the  guard. 

173.  (Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock 
without  deranging  the  position  of  the  butt. 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support  the  butt  against  the 
right  shoulder;  the  left  elbow  down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder;  incline 

*  If  Maynard's  primer  he  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in  eight  times,  and  the  eighth 
command  will  be,  shoulder  arms,  and  executed  from  return  rammer,  in  one  time  and  two 
motions,  as  follows  :  ; 

(First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the  position  ot  shoulder 
arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

(Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


;V  j 


# 


ffl 


- 


■r- 


I 


n 


W 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  21 


the  head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive  quickly  the  notch 
of  the  hausse,  the  front  sight,  and  the  object  aimed  at;  the  left  eye  closed,  the 
right  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger. 

175.  "When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to  execute  the  firings,  the 
front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little  less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  towards  the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire,  without  lowering  or 
turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when  the  men  fire,  that  they 
aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and  that  the  barrel  be  so  directed  that  the  line  of 
fire  and  the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical  plane.  They  will  often  cause 
the  firing  to  be  executed  on  ground  of  different  inclinations,  in  order  to  accus- 
tom the  men  to  fire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 


Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the  same  time  face  to  the 
front  and  take  the  position  of  load  as  indicated  No.  156.  Each  rear  rank  man 
will  bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  loading 
to  be  continued  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  No.  156  and  following. 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recruits  to  reload, 
he  will  command: 

Shoulder— Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  and  resume  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms,  at  the  same  time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel, 
and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  command  fire,  the  instructor, 
when  they  are  in  the  position  of  aim,  will  command: 

Recover — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the  finger  from  the  trig- 
ger; at  the  command  arms,  retake  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready,  if  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

2 


I 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 


Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

166.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock,  the  fore- 
finger oa  the  trigger,  half-cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder, 
and  retake  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

187.  Ti  e  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

183.  {First,  second,  and  third  motions.)  Same  as  in  first,  second  and  third 
motions  in  the  first  time  of  loading,  except  in  the  third  motion  the  right  hand 
is  carried  to  the  bayonet,  grasping  it,  with  the  little  finger  up. 

189.  (Fourth  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard,  fix  it,  seize 
the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the 
barrel,  arm  extended 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

190.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  seize  the  piece  at  the 
same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore 
finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

191.  (Second  motion.)     Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

192.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to 
fix  bayonets,  he  will  give  the  command  fix  bayonets,  when  the  pieces  will  be 
brought  to  the  left  side  at  one  motion,  and  held  as  prescribed  in  No.  188.  At 
the  second  motion  the  bayonets  will  be  fixed  as  in  No.  189;  immediately  re- 
sume the  position  of  ordered  arms.  , 

Charge— Bayonet. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

193.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand  and 
make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right 
foot  opposite  to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet  square ;  seize  the 
piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  tlie  lower  band. 

194.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at 
the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against  the  hip  ; 
the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions: 

195.  (First  motion.)    Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  in 


I 


pwur 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  23 


facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front  ; 
turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  extended. 

196.  {Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

Trail— Arms. 

One  lime  and  tico  7notions. 

197.  (First  motion.)     The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  order  onus. 

198.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  front,  the  butt 
to  the  rear  and  about  tour  inches  from  the  ground.  The  right  hind  supported 
at  the  hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men  may  not  touch  with 
their  bayonets  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 

Shoulder— Arms. 

1{X).  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  in  the  right 
hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel;  at  the  command  arms,  execute 
what  has  beeu  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Unjiz—B  A  YON  ET . 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

200.  (First  and  second  motions.)     Same  as  infix  bayonet. 

201.  (Third  motion.)     Same  as  in  fix  bayonet,  except,  turn  the  bayonet 

clasp  with  the  right  thumb,  grasp  the  shank  of  the  bayonet  with  the  right 
hand,  palm  under,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  well  up  the  blade  of  the  bayonet. 
•20->.  (Fourth  motion.)  Wrench  off  the  bayonet,  return  it  to  the  scibliard, 
grasp  the  piece  at  the  upper  baud  with  the  right  hand,  lower  the  left  hand 
along  the  barrel,  the  arm  extended  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

283.  (First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  from' Jir bayonet,  No.  190  and 
No.  191. 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  support  arms,  Xo. 
133,  except  with  the  right  hand  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 
front;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left 
hand  at  the  lower  baud,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  extended  on  the 
rammer;  the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm 
against  the  piece. 

206.  (Third  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the  left  arm,  the 
left  hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent 
it  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip,  the  right  hand 
falling  at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 


24  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 


Shoulder — ARMS. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

207.  (First  motion.)  Kaise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize  it  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and  detached  from 
the  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  piece. 

208.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion  of  shoulder  arms 
from  a  support. 

209.  (Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion  of  shoulder  arms 
from  a  support. 

Right  shoulder  shift — ARMS. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

210.  (First  motion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpendicularly  from  the  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and 
guide-sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder  and 
four  inches  from  it;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the 
beak  between  the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

211.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  raise  and  place 
the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards  ; 
let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder— Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  (First  motion.)  Eaise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by  extending  the  right 
arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight. 

213.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  imme- 
diately embrace  the  guard,  lower  the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms, 
slide  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and 
closed.     Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor  will  sometimes  cause 
pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder.    To  this  effect,  he  will  command: 

Right  shoulder  shift — ARMS. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

215.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  below  and  near 
the  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  be- 
tween the  first  two  fingers. 

216.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  plate  up- 
wards, carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the 
muzzle  elevated;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and  place  the  right  hand  upon 
the  butt  as  is  prescribed  No.  210,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

217.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  shoulder  arms,  No. 
212. 


m. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  25 


218.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  to  the 
front,  carry  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast  as  is  prescribed  No.  134, 
and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Arms— At  will. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  shoulder,  with 
one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Shoulder — AtlMS 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed  on  the  ground,  he  will  command: 

Ground — ARMS. 

One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

222.  (First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  band,  Hie  barrel  to  the 
left,  at  the  same  time  seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body, 
advance  the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lower  band;  lay  the  piece  on  the 
ground  with  the  right  hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  the  right  toe,  the 
knees  slightly  bent,  the  right  heel  raised. 

223.  (Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right, 
-quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the  fide. 

Raise — ARMS. 
One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

224.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the 
body,  advance  the  left  foot  opposite  the  lower  baud,  aud  seize  the  piece  with 
the  right  hand. 

225.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  bringing  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  right;  turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  at  the 
same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  this  hand  by  the 
side. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  with  bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if 
the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command: 

Inspection — Arms. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

(First  and  second  motions.)  Same  as  mfiz-bayonct,  Xo.  192,  except  that  the 
left  hand  remains*  at  the  muzzle  and  the  rammer  head  is  seized  between  thumb 
and  fore-finger,  as  in  draw  rammer. 

227.     (Third  motion.)  Spring  rammer  as  prescribed  in  loading ;  lower  the 


26  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  11. 


left  hand  along  the  piece  to  full  extent  of  arm,  grasping  the  piece  at  the  muz- 
zle band  with  right  hand 

228.  {Fourth  motion.)     Bring  the  piece  to  position  of  order  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the  piece  of  each  recruit, 
in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him, 
will  raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize  it  with  the  left  between 
the  lower  band  and  guide  sight,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye;  the  instructor  will  take  it  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  handle,  and,  after  inspecting  it,  Will  return  it  to  the  re- 
cruit who  will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand,  and  replace  it  in  the  posi- 
tion of  ordered  arms. 

230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each  recruit  will  retake 
the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer, 
and  resume  the  position  of  ordered%arms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor  should  merely  wish  to 
cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  No.  192,  fix  bayonets  as  has  been  explain- 
ed, and  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  ascertain  whether 
the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will  command  : 

Spring — Rammers. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  explained  above,  and  imme- 
diately retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the  rammer  by  the 
small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in 
the  barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will  return  rammer,  and 
.resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

Remarks  on  the  Manual  of  arms. 

237.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the  persons  of  recruits  before 
they  acquire  ease  and  confidence  in  the  several  positions.  The  instructor  will 
therefore  frequently  recur  the  elementary  principles  in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Recruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve  the  sides  and  back,  and  to 
derange  the  shoulders,  especially  in  loading.  Consequently,  the  instructor  will 
not  cause  them  to  dwell  too  long,  at  a  time,  in  one  position. 

239.  When,  after  some  days  of  exercise  in  the  manual  of  arms,  the  four 
men  shall  be  well  established  in  their  use,  the  instructor  will  always  terminate 
the  lesson  by  marching  the  men  for  some  time  in  one  rank,  and  at  one  pace 
apart,  in  common  and  quick  time  in  order  to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in 
the  mechanism  of  the  step;  he  will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time  and  to  change 
step,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

To  mark  lime. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  27 


241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  he  given  at  the  instant  a  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by- 
bringing  the  heels  by  the  6ide  of  each  other,  and  observing  the  cadence  of  the 
step,  by  raising  each  foot  alternately  without  advancing. 

242. "  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be  resumed,  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.      2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  as  prescribed  above,  the 
recruits  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1 .   Change  step.     2.  MARCH. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  either  foot 
is  coining  to  the  ground,  bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  Bide  of  that 
which  is  in  front,  and  step  off  again  with  the  foot  which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backicards. 

24G.     The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  backwards,  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step  off  smartly  with  the 
left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the  rear,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on 
with  the  feet  in  succession  till  the  command  halt,  which  will  always  be  pre- 
ceded by  the  caution  squad.  The  men  will  halt  at  tnis  command,  and  bring 
back  the  foot  in  front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

24S.     This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time.  _ 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  recruits  march  straight  to 
the  rear,  and  that  the  erect  position  of  the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lesson  III. 

To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  recruits  to  load.at  will,  and 
to  cause  them  to  distinguish  the  times  which  require  the  greatest  regularity 
and  attention,  such  as  charge  cartridge,  ram  cartridge,  and  prime.  It  will  be 
divided  as  follows : 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of  the  command ;  the  three 
others  at  the  commands,  two,  three  and  four. 

The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.       2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 
C53.    Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 


28  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 

Three. 

254.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will,  which  will  be  executed 
as  loading  in  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without  resting  on  either  of  the 
times.     He  will  command  : 

1.  Load  at  will.     2.  LOAD. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  degrees,  to  load  with 
the  greatest  possible  promptitude,  each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neigh- 
bor, and  above  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  not  applicable  to  loading  in  four 
times,  or  at  will. 

Lesson  IV. 
Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be  executed  as  follows : 

The  direct  fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Fire  by  squad.    2.  Squad.    3.  Keady.     4.  Aim.    5.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

261.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  in 
the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the  third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  posi- 
tion of  ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth  they  will  aim  according 
to  the  rank  in  which  each  may  find  himself  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining 
forward  a  little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may 
reach  as  much  beyond  the  front  rank  as  possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  return  imme- 
diately to  the  position  of  ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  commands : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease,  he  will  command : 

Cease  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing,  but  will  load  their  pieces 
if  unloaded,  and  afterwards  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II.  29 


Oblique  Firings. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the  right  and  left,  and  by  the 
same  commands  as  the  direct  fire,  with  this  single  difference — the  command 
aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or  left  oblique. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  right. 

267.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  execute  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command,  right  oblique,  the  two  ranks  will  throw 
back  the  right  shoulder  and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will  aim  to  the  right  with- 
out deranging  the  feet ;  each  rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file  lead- 
er and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bend- 
ing a  little  the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  tiro  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  oblique,  the  two  ranks  will  throw  back 
the  left  shoulder  and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take  aim  to  the  left  without 
deranging  the  feet;  each  man  in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file 
leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and 
bending  a  little  the  right  knee. 

£72.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command  load,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  come 
to  the  position  of  load  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire ;  the  rear  rank  men  bring- 
ing back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by  the  side  of  the  other.  Each 
man  will  continue  to  load  as  if  isolated. 

To  fire  by  file. 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the  two  ranks,  the  files  of  which 
will  fire  successively,  and  without  regulating  on  each  other,  except  for  the  first 
fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Squad.    3.  Ready.    4.  Commence  Firing. 

275.  At  th*  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  position  prescribed 
in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will  aim  and  fire;  the 
rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the  position  indicated  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly  and  fire  a  second 
time  ;  reload  and  fire  again,  and  so  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to 
reload,  and  will  conform  in  all  respects  to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  will  not  be  required 
to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

_  280.     Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position  of  ready  and  con- 
tinue the  fire. 
281.    When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease,  he  will  command: 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  II. 


Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If  they  have  fired  they 
will  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder;  if  at  the  position  of  ready, 
they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  position  of  aim,  they  will 
bring  down  their  pieces,  half-cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  by  rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire  rank,  alternately. 

284.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Rear  rank.    5.  Aim.    6.  FiRE. 

7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  position  of  ready, 
as  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will  execute  that  which  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire,  and  afterwards  take  the  position  of  ready. 

287.  As  soon  as  the,  instructor  sees  several  men  of  the  rear  rank  in  the 
position  of  ready,  he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  rear  rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  rear  rank,  and  will 
thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to 
cease,  when  he  will  command,  cease  firing,  which  will  be  executed  as  hereto- 
fore prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 
To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed  loaded  and  drawn  up  in 
one  rank.  The  instruction  will  be  given  to  each  man  individually,  without 
times  or  motions,  and  in  the  following  manner. 

29 1 .  The  instructor  will  command : 

Fire  and  load  kneeling. 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will  move  for- 
ward three  paces  and  halt;  then  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the 
right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient  for  placing  the  right  knee 
upon  the  ground  in  bending  the  left  leg ;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  ; 
lower  the  piece,  the  left  fore-arm  supported  upon  the  thigh  on  the  same  side, 
the  right  hand  on  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right  thigh, 
the  left  hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left  around  the  knee  supported 
on  the  ground,  until  this  leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the  left 
foot,  and  thus  seat  h  jmself  comfortably  on  the  right  heel. 

294.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  support  it  with  the  left,  hold- 


'& 


n 


ff:.' 


_,-:..  V7     ■ 


\0 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    II.  31 


ina  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh  near  the 
knee  ;  seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  forefinger  under  the  guard,  cock 
and  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder, 
aim  and  fire. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and  support  it  with  the 
left  hand, the  butt  resting  against  the  right  thigh;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear 
rising  on  the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground;  in 
this  position  support  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw 
cartridge  with  the  right  hand  and  load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  necessary, 
with  both  bunds. 

296.  When  loaded  bnng  the  piece  to  the  front  with  the  left  hand,  which 
holds  itatthe  upper  band  ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  rhe  right  hand  at 
the  small  of  the  stock;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost  and  nearly  hori- 
zontal, the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  thigh;  half-cock,  remove  the  old  cap 
and  prime;  rise,  and  return  to  the  ranks. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  his  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  first,  and  so  on  through  the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fire  and  lo a d  hjiu g . 

293.     In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank  and  loaded  ;  them 
tion  will  be  gi*en  individually  and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command  ; 

Fire  and  load  lying. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will  move  for- 
ward three  paces  and  halt ;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on 
both  knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his  belly.  In  this  position 
he  will  support  the  piece  nearly  horizontal  with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near 
th<'  lower  band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the 
ground,  the  barrel  uppermost;  cock  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  cany 
this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  press  the 
butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on  both  elbows,  aim  and^Jre. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down  and  turn  upon  his  left 
side,  still  resting  on  his  left  elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  op- 
p:>site  his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground  ;  take  out  a  cartridge  with 
the  right  hand;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  car- 
tridge with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers  ;  he  will  then  throw  himself  on  his 
back  still  holding  the  piece  with  both  hands;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place 
the  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle  elevated.  In  this  posi- 
tion, charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer,  ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again  upon  his  left  side,  re- 
move the  old  cap  and  prime,  then  raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn  about, 
and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  .  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has  just  beeu  prescribed  for  the 
first,  and  so  on  throughout  the  squad. 

Lesson  VI. 

Bayonet  Exercise. 

* 

304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  confined  to  two  movements, 
the  guard  against  infantry,  and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be 
placed  in  one  rnuk,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  being  at  shoulder  arms,  the 
instructor  will  command: 


32  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III. 

1.   Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  GUARD. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

305.  (First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  turning  on  both  heels, 
the  feet  square  to  each  other;  at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  ana 
seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

306.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty  inches  perpendicularly 
to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on  the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly 
bent,  the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs;  lower  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body;  seize  the 
piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  arms 
falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  it  against  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left  and  face 
to  the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  Cavalry.     2.  GUARD. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

308.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against  infantry,  except  that  the 
right  hand  will  be  supported  against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height 
of  the  eye,  as  in  charge  bayonet. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it  against  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face 
to  the  front. 

PART  THIRD. 

310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the  principles  and  mechan- 
ism of  the  step,  the  position  of  the  body,  and  the  manual  of  arms,  the  instructor 
will  unite  eight  men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order  to  teach  them 
the  principles  of  alignment,  the  principles  of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching 
to  the  front,  the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank,  wheeling  from  a  halt, 
wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He 
will  place  the  squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and  number  the  men  from 
right  to  left. 

Lesson  I. 

Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to  align  themselves  man  by 
man,  in  order  the  better  to  make  them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment; 


€6 


7., 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III.  33 


to  this  end,  he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march  two 
paces  to  the  front,  aud  having  aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of 
the  squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called,  each  by  his  number, 
and  align  themselves  successively  on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the  first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in 
quick  time  tico  paces  foricard,  shortening  the  last,  so  as  to  find  himself  about  six 
inches  behind  the  new  alignment,  which  he  ought  never  to  pass :  he  will  next 
move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the  hams  extended,  to  the 
side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on  the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the 
head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders,  he  may  find  himself  in  the 
exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening 
his  own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned,  will  command: 

Front. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  and  remain  firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to  align  themselves  man  by 
man,  correctly,  and  without  groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
entire  rank  tw  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command :  a 

Bight  (or  left)— DRESS. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed  in  advance  as  a  basis  of 
alignment,  will  move  up  in  quick  time,  aud  place  themselves  on  the  new  line, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front,  and  facing  the  rank, 
will  carefully  observe  that  the  principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the 
flank  that  has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  number  of  the  rank  aligned,  will 
command : 

Front. 

320  The  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  or  that  file  foricard  or  back, 
designating  each  by  its  number.  The  file  or  files  designated,  only,  will  slightly 
turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much  they  ought  to  move  up  or 
back,  steadily  place  themselves  on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
without  a  particular  command  to  that  effect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  the 
recruits  stepping  back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312,  the  instructor  commanding: 

Right  (or  left)  backward — DRESS. 

322.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  examine  the  position  of  the 
men,  and  cause  the  rank  to  come  to  ordered  arms,  to  prevent  too  much  fatigue 
and  also  the  danger  of  negligence  at  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson   II. 

323.  The  men  having  learned,  in  the  first  and  second  parts,  to  march  with 
steadiness  in  common  time,  and  to  take  steps  equal  in  leugth  and  swiftness, 
will  be  exercised  in  the  third  part  only  in  quick  time,  double  quick  time,  and  the 


34  SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER PART  III. 


run ;  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  execute  successively,  at  these  different 
gaits,  the  march  to  the  front,  the  facing  about  in  marching,  the  inarch  by  the 
flank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the  changes  of  direction  to  the 
side  of  the  guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at  the  command  march, 
they  will  always  move  off  in  quick  time,  unless  this  command  should  be  pre- 
ceded by  that  of  double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  march  by  the  front,  he  will  place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right 
or  the  left,  according  to  the  side  on  which  he  may  wish  the  guide  to  be,  and 
command : 

1.  Squad,  foncard.     2.  Guide  right  (or  left.)     3.  March. 

326.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 
foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to  march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoul- 
ers  always  in  a  square  with  that  line.  , 

327.  The  instructor. will  observe,  in  marching  to  the  front,  that  the  men 
touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the  side  of  the  guide;  that  they  do  not  open 
out  the  left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm ;  that  they  yield  to  pressure  coming  from 
the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming  from  the  opposite  side ;  that  they 
recover  by  insensible  degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if  lost;  that  they 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which  side  the  guide  may 
be ;  and  if  found  before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man  in  fault  corrects 
himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step,  by  degrees,  almost  insensible. 

328.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to  comprehend  that  the 
alignment  can  only  be  preserved,  in  maiching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step, 
the  touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  shoulders  in  a  square  with 
the  line  of  direction;  that  if,  for  example,  the  step  of  some  be  longer  than  that 
of  others,  or  if  some  march  faster  than  others,  a  separation  of  elbows,  and  a 
loss  of  the  alignment,  would  be  inevitable;  that  if  [it  being  required  that  the 
head  should  be  direct  to  the  front]  they  do  not  strictly  observe  the  touch 
of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  for  an  individual  to  judge  whether  he  marches 
abreast  with  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether  there  be  not  an  interval  be- 
tween them. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  tendency  to  make  men  too 
easy  and  free  in  their  movements,  the  instructor  will  be  careful  to  regulate  the 
cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habituate  them  to  preserve  always  the  erectness 
of  the  body,  and  the  due  length  of  the  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  direct  march, 
the  instructor  will  exercise  them  in  marching  obliquely.  The  rank  being  in 
inarch,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Right  [or  left]  oblique.     2.  March.      . 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
[or  left],  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the 
men  no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the  near- 
est files  towards  the  side  to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their 
steps  so*that  the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor 
on  that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  men  in  the 
rank.  Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same  length  of  pace,  and  the 
same  degree  of  obliquity. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III.  35 


332.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive  direction,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Foricard.      2.  March. 

:'.33.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left 
[or  right],  and  all  will  then  march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the 
principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  explained,  have  become  famil- 
iar to  the  recruits,  and  they  shall  be  well  established  iu  the  position  of  the 
body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism,  length,  and  swiftness  of  the 
step,  the  instructor  will  pass  them  from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  re- 
verse, observing  not  to  make  them  march  obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till 
they  are  well  established  in  the  cadence  of  this  step.  • 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Double  quick.     %  March. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when  either  toof  is  com- 
ing to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  step  off  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will 
endeavor  to  follow  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first  part  of  ttis  book,  and 
to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume  the  step  in  quick 
time,  he  will  command: 

1.   Quick  time.     2.  March. 

333.  At  the  command  marfh,  which  will  be  given  when  either  foot  is  com- 
ing to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  halt  it  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  Nos.  98  and  99.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  an 
instant  before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  ground. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  oc- 
casionally cause  it  to  mark  time  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  240.  The 
men  will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering  the  cadence  of  the 
step.  He  will  also  cause  them  to  pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  step,  and 
reciprocally,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  330,  and  following. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  car.se  it  to  march  in 
double  quick  time,  by  preceding  the  command  march,  by  double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well  the  cadence  of  this  stem 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double  quick  time,  and  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  Squad  right  about.    2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  left 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III. 


turning  on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear ;  he  will  then  place  the  right  foot  in  the  new 
direction,  and  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

To  march  backwards. 

345.  The  squad  heing  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it 
in  the  back  step,  he  will  command : 

1.  Squad  backward.    2.  Guide  left  (or  right.)    3.  March. 

346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,in  this  step,  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do  not  lean 
on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should  only  be  executed  at 
shouldered  arms,  the  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much,  and 
also  to  prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  position,  will  halt  the  squad  from  time 
to  time,  and  ca^ise  arms  to  be  ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will  always  carry  their 
pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at  a  trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a  trail,  he  will  give 
the  command  trail  arms,  before  the  command  double  quick.  If,  on  the  con- 
trary, this  command  be  not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces  to  the  right 
shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick.  In  either  case,  at  the  command  halt, 
the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.  This  rule  is 
general. 

Lesson  III. 

The  march  by  the  flank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Squad,  right— Face.     2.  Forward.     3.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank  will  face  to  the  right ; 
the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the  right 
side  of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter  standing  fast,  so  that  when  the  move- 
ment is  executed,  the  men  will  be  formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 
foot ;  the  files  keeping  aligned,  and  preserving  their  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  the  word  left;  for  right,  and  by  inverse  means  ;  in  this  case,  the 
even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will  stand  fast,  and  the  odd  num- 
bered will  place  themselves  on  their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well  instructed  soldier  by  the  side  of  the 
recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of  the  rank,  to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct 
him ;  and  ft  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always  elbow  to  elbow 
with  the  soldier. 

356.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in  the  march,  by  the  flank, 
the  following  rules : 

% 
That  the  step  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  direct  step  ; 

Because  these  principles,  without  which  men,  placed  elbow  to  elbow,  in  the 
same  rank,  cannot  preserve  unity  and  harmony  of  movement,  are  of  a  more 
necessary  observance  in  marching  in  file. 


SCHOOL    OF    THfi    SOLDIER — PART    III.  37 

That  the  head  of  the  man  icho  immediately  precedes,  covers  the  heads  of  all  who 

are  in  front ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each  inau  may  maintain  him- 
self in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  five  or  six  paces  on  the 
flank  of  the  rank  marching  in  file,  to  watch  over  the  execution  of  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  above,  He  will  also  place  himself  sometimes  in  its  rear,  halt, 
and  suffer  it  t<>  pass  fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  the  better  to  see  whether  the  men 
cover  each  other  accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he  will  command' 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  afterwards  no  man 
will  stir,  although  he  may  have  lost  his  distance.     This  prohibition  it  m 

ry,  to  habituate  tin*  meu  to  a  constant  preservation  of  their  distances. 

360.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by  facing  to  the  left,  if 
marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  left 
flank.  The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move  quickly  into  their 
places,  so  as  to- form  the  Bquad  again  into  one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to  marching  by  the  flank,  the 
instructor  will  cause  them  to  change  direction  by  file;  for  this  purpose,  he  will 
coin  maud: 

1.  By  Jile  left  (or  right).     2.  Mar  Of. 

362.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change  direction  to  the  left 
(or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight 
forward;  the  two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the 
elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which  the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the 
first  three  or  four  stops.  Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the 
same  spot  where  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled.      . 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face  by  the  right  or  left 
flank  in  marching,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command: 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  MARCH. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a  little  before  either 
foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is 
raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  without  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step;  the  men  will  double  or  undouble  rapidly. 

365.  If,  in  faciug  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank,  the  squad  dhould  face  to  the 
tear,  the  men  will  come  into  one  rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles  indicated 
No.  36U.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is  thejnen  who  are  in  rear  who  always 
move  up  to  form  into  single  rank,  and  in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the 
order  of  the  numbers  in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  should 
cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  it  is  the  even  numbers  who  will  double  by 
moving  to  the  right  of  the  odd  numbers  ;  but  if  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  odd 
numbers  who  will  double  to  the  left  of  the  even  numbers.  Observe  the  two 
following  rules  in  the  facings,  viz: 

J.     Never  gain  ground  to  the  front  in  doubling; 

2.     Never  reverse  the  order  of  the  numbers  in  undoubling. 

The  front  referred  to,  is  the  original  or  real  front.  The  numbers  would  be 
reversed,  if  in  counting,  beginning  on  the  right  of  the  company,  number  two 
•should  call  before  number  one.  These  rules  apply  to  all  facings,  whether  the 
companv  be  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

3 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER PART  III. 


/ 


367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be  practiced  with  pieces  at  a 
shoulder;  but  the  instructor  may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasionally  order 
support  arms,  and  he  will  require  of  the  recruits  marching  in  this  position,  as 
much  regularity  as  in  the  former. 

The  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time,  are  the 
same  as  in  quick  time.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No. 
351,  taking  care  always  to  give  the  command  double  quick  before  that  of 
march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  cadence  of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direction,  and  the  march  by 
the  flank,  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by  the  same  commands,  and 
according  to  the  same  principles,  as  in  quick  time. 

37 J.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  carried  either  on  the  right 
shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad  by  the  flank,  without 
doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  priueiples  of  this  march  are  the  same  as  in  two  ranks,  and  it  will 
always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed  No.. 351,  but  he 
will  be  careful  to  caution  the  squad  not  to  double  files. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do  not  bend  their  knees 
unequally,  which  would  cause  them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front, 
and  also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  distances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be  executed  in  single  rank. 
In  the  changes  of  direction,  the  leading  man  will  change  direction  without 
altering  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.  The  instructor  will  recall  to 
the  intention  of  the  men,  that  in  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching, 
they  will  not  double,  but  march  in  one  rank. 


Lesson  IV. 

W  JH  E  E  L  I  N  G  S . 
General  principles  of  Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds:  from  halts,  or  on  fixed  pivots,  and  in 
march,  or  on  moveable,  pivots. 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  passing  a  corps  from  the 
order  in  battle  to  the  order  in  column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  ki  marching  take  place  in  changes  of  direction  in  column, 
as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed  to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns  in  his  place,  without 
advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes  steps  of  nine  or  eleven 
inches,  according  as  the  squad  is  marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so 
as  to  clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order  that  the  subdivi- 
sions of  a  column  may  change  direction  without  losing  their  distances,  as  will 
be  explained  in  the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the  full  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches,  or  thirty  three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    SOLDIER PART    III.  39 


383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place  a  well  instructed 
man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to  conduct  it.  and  then  command: 

1.  By  squad,  right  ichrrl.     2.  March. 

3^4.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step  off  with  the  left  foot, 
turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a  little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the 
line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  to  their  left;  the  pivot-man  will  merely  mark  time 
in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement  of 
the  marching  flank;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twen- 
ty-eight inches,  and  from  the  first  step  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast 
his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank,  and  feel  constantly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

385.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  towards 
the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform 
himself  to  the  marching  flank— shortening  his  step  according  to  his  approxi- 
mation to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round  the  circle  once  or 
twice  before  halting,  in  order  to  cause  the  principles  to  be  the  better  under- 
stood, and  he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not  break. 

387.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  wheel,  he  will  command: 

I.  Squid.    2.  Halt. 

389.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  no  man  stir.  The 
instructor,  going  to  the  flank  opposite  the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men 
of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  aive  to  the  rank,  without  how- 
ever displacing  the  pivot,  who  will  conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this 
direction.  The  instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two  men.  and 
the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  He  will  then 
command: 

Left  (or  right )— Dr  BS& 

390.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of  the  two  men 
established  as  the  basis,  in  conformity  with  the  principles  presciibed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  command  FROXT^which  will  be  executed 
as  prescribed  No.  314. 

Remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a  hah. 

392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  toicards  the  marching  flank,  and  fix  the  ryes  un 
the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  icho  arc  on  that  side; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each  man  to  regulate  the 
length  of  his  step  so  as  to  conform  his  own  movement  to  that  of  the  marching 
flank. 

Touch  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  toicards  the  pivot  ; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching  flank  ; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  ueglected,  the  pivot,  which  ought  to  be  a  fixed 
p  oint,  in  wheels  from  a  halt,  might  be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 


40  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

Wltecling  in  marching,  or  on  a  moveable  pivot. 

39*3.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  execute  well  the  wheel  from 
a  halt,  they  will  be  taught  to  wheel  in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  reverse  flank,  (to  the  side  opposite  to 
the  guide  or  pivot  flank,)  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.    2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet  four  paces  from 
the  wheeling  point. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  executed  in  the  same 
manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards 
the  marching  flank  (or  side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the*  side  of  the  actual 
pivot;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead  of  merely  turning  in  his  place,  will  conform 
himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the 
next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  ground  forward  in  des- 
cribing a  small  curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel.  The  middle  of 
the  rank  will  bend  ^lightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as  the  movement  shall  com- 
mence, the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the 
ground  over  which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

398.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when  four  paces  are  yet 
required  to  complete  the  change  of  direction. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  of  comple- 
ting the  wheel;  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself 
straight  forward  ;  the  pivot  man  and  all  the  rank  will  retake  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head  direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

4U0.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  in  marching,  will  be 
executed  as  follows  :     The  instructor  will  command : 

» 
1.  Left  [or  right']  turn.     2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet  four  paces 
from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  the  rank 
ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the  left  [or  right]  in  marching,  and  move 
forward  in  the  new  direction  without  slackening  or  quickening  the  cadence, 
and  without  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step.  The  whole  rank  will  promptly 
conform  itself  to  the  new  direction  :  to  effect  which,  each  man  will  advance 
the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  take  the  double  quick  step,  to  carry  him- 
self in  the  new  direction,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  and 
retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side,  in  placing  himself  on  the 
alignment  of  the  guide,  from  whom  he  will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume 
the  direct  position  of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arrive  successively  on 
the  alignment. 

Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  in  double  quick  time. 

403.  When  the  recruits  comprehend  and  execute  well,  in  quick  time,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  41 


wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  same  movements  to  be  repeated  hi 
double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands 
and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  in  quick  time,  except  that,  the  com- 
mand double  quick  will  precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling  while  matching, 
the  pivot  man  will  take  steps  af  eleven  inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direc- 
tion to  the  side  of  the  guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide  must 
increase  the  gait  in  order  to  briug  themselves  into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  recruits,  and  not  to  divide 
their  attention,  will  cause  them  to  execute  the  several  movements  of  which 
this  lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after  the  mechanism  be 
well  comprehended,  with  arms. 

Lesson    V. 

Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

408.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the  exercises  in  double  quick 
time  and  the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  Ions;  marches  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  both 
by  the  front  and  by  the  flank,  and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to 
pass  over  a  distance  of  five  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The  pieces  will  be  car- 
ried on  either  shoulder,  and  sometimes  at  a  trail. 

403.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at  a  run,  the  pieces  car- 
ried at  will;  the  men  will  be  instructed  to  keep  as  united  as  possible,  with- 
out however  exacting  much  regularity,  which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to  when  it  may  be 
highly  important  to  reach  a  given  point  with  great  promptitude. 

Stack  arms. 

The  squad  being  in  two  ranks  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Stack— -Arms. 


410.  At  this  command,  number  two  of  the  front  rank,  will  pass  his  piece 
before  him,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  about  the  middle  band,  slope  it  across 
the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear,  the  butt  three  inches  above  the  right  toe  of  the 
man  on  his  left,  muzzle  six  inches  to  the  right  of  his  right  shoulder. 

411.  Number  two  of  the  rear  rank  will  turn  his  piece,  lock  square  to  the 
front,  and  pass  it  to  his  front  rank  man,  who  will  seize  it  with  his  right  hand 
about  the  middle  band  and  incline  it  forward,  resting  the  neck  of  the  bayonet 
on  that  of  his  own  bayonet  aud  close  to  the  blade. 

Number  one  of  the  front  rank  will  turn  the  barrel  of  his  piece  square  to 
the  front,  slope  it  across  the  body,  place  the  neck  of  his  bayonet,  above  the 
necks,  and  between  the  blades  of  the  other  two  bayonets,  holding  the  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  at  the  middle  baud,  the  butt  three  inches  from  the 
ground  in  front  of  his  right  toe. 

412.  Number  two  of  the  front  rank  will  throw  the  butt  of  the  rear  rank 
man's  piece  about  thirty  inches  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  resting  the  butt 
of  his  own  piece  on  the  ground  on  the  lett,  and  a  little  in  rear  of  his  left  toe. 
At  the  same  instant,  number  one  of  the  front  rank  will  rest  the  butt  of  his 
piece  on  the  ground,  a  little  in  front  of  his  right  toe. 

Number  one  of  the  rear  rank  will  incline  his  piece  on  the  stack  thus 
formed. 


42  SCHOOL    OF    THR    COMPANY. 


413.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position  of  the  soldier  with- 
out arms,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Break  ranks.    2.  March. 
To  resume  arms. 

414.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their  stacks,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

Take — Arms. 

415.  At  this  command,  number  one  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake  his  piece. 
Number  two  of  the  front  rank  will  seize  his  own  piece  with  his  left  hand,  at 
the  middle  band,  and  his  rear  rank  man's  piece  in  the  same  manner  with  his 
right  hand  ;  and  number  one  of  the  front  rank  will  seize  his  piece  with  his 
right  hand  in  the  same  manner. 

These  two  men  will  raise  the  stack,  bring  the  butts  together  and  disengage 
the  bayonets.  Number  two  of  the  rear  rank  will  receive  his  piece  from  his 
front  rank  man,  and  all  will  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

END  OF   THE   SCHOOL  OF   THE   SOLDIER. 


TITLE    THIRD. 

SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY. 

General  Rttles  and  division  of  the  School  of  the  Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that  by  battalion,  and  the 
object  being  to  prepare  the  soldiers  for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of 
detail  by  company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  respect  to  principles, 
as  the  order  of  progression  herein  prescribed. 

2  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing  elementary  instruc- 
tion, a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant,  and  a  certain  number  of  file  closers,  the 
whole  posted  in  the  manner  indicated,  Title  First,  and,  according'  to  the  same 
Title,  the  officer  charged  with  the  exercise  of  such  company  will  herein  be 
denominated  the  instructor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided  into  six  lessons,  and  each 
lesson  will  comprehend  five  articles,  as  follows : 

Lesson  I. 

1.  ,To  open  ranks. 

2.  Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  close  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manuel  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

Lesson  II. 

1.  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

2  To  fire  by  company. 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4  To  fire  by  rank. 

rV  To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  43 


Lesson  III 

1.  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

3.  Oblique  march  iu  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back  step. 

5.  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 

Lesson  IV. 

1.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to  iace  ir  to  the  front. 

4.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  on  thj  i-ight  or 
left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by  company  or  platoon 
into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

Lesson  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt,  or  while  marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  the  column. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of 
battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Lesson  VI. 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

2.  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  movements  incident 
thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of 
battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks.  The  instructor  will 
then  cause  the  files  to  be  numbered,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command : 

In  each  rank — Count  TWOS. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  right  to  left,  pro- 
nouncing in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and 
without  turning  the  head,  one,  txco,  according  to  the  place  which  each  one 
occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the  company  to  be  divided  into  platoons  and 
sections,  taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed  of  an  even 
number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as  possible  in  his  explana- 
tions ;  he  will  cause  faults  of  detail  to  be  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom 
he  will  indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should  not  have  himself  observed  them; 
and  the  instructor  will  not  otherwise  interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not 
well  comprehend,  or  should  badly  execute  his  inteutions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who  commands,  and  in  those 
who  obey,  being  the  first  means  of  order  in  a  body  of  troops,  the  instructor 
will  labor  to  habituate  the  company  to  this  essential  quality,  and  will  himself 
give  the  example. 


44  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    I. 

LESSON     FIRST. 
Article  First. 

To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranks  and  file  closers  well 
aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  he 
will  direct  the  left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Shoulder — ARMS.     4.   To  the  rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide,  will 
step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark 
the  alignment  of  tbe  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  this  distance  by  the  eye, 
without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  flank, 
in  order  to  observe,  if  these  two  non-commissioned  officers  are  on  a  line  par- 
allel to  the  front  rank,  and  if  necessary,  to  correct  their  positions,  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

5.  March. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without  counting  the  steps,  and 
will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment  marked  for  this  rank*,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on  the  left  guide  placed 
to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same  time  with  the  rear 
rank,  and  will  place  themselves  two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will  command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  will  return  ' 
to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor  will  direct  the  captain  and 
the  covering  sergeant  to  observe  the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and  to 
correct,  if  necessary,  the  positions  of  persons  and  pieces. 

Article  Second. 

Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the  first  exercises,  align 
the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the  right  or  left  of 
each  rank  to  march  two  or  three  paces  forward,  and.  after  having  aligned 
them,  command: 

By  file  right  (or  left) — DRESS. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up  successively  on  the  align- 
ment, each  man  being  preceded  by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    I.  45 


the  basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned  himself,  will  cast  his 
eyes  to  the  front. 

21.  Succeesive  alignments  having  habituated  the  soldiers  to  dress  correctly, 
the  instructor  will  cause  the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and 
backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction  parallel,  and  sometimes  in  one  oblique,  to 
the  original  direction,  giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a 
basis  of  alignment  to  each  rank.     To  effect  which,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  (or  left)  —Dress.    2.  Front. 


J.  Right  (or  left)backicard — DRESS.     2.  FRONT.    ' 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will 
not  seek  to  cover  their  file  leaders,  as  the  sole  object  of  the  exercise  is  to 
teach  them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective  ranks,  in  the 
different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  superintend  the  front  rank, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will  place 
themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks  are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the  line  of  their  shoulders 
to  the  new  direction  of  their  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment 
as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  317  or  No.  321,  accord- 
ing as  the  new  direction  shall  be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 

25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant 
will  pass  along  the  front  of  the  ranks  to  correct  the  positions  of  persons  and 
arms. 

ARTICLE     THIRD . 
Manual  of  Arms. 

26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place  himself  in  a  position 
to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  command  the  manual  of  arms  in  the  following  order  : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoulder  arms'. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Secure  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 
Load  in  nine  times. 

27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  position  of  the  body,  of  the 
feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  always  exact,  and  that  the  times  be  briskly  exe- 
cuted and  close  to  the  person. 

ARTICLE      FOURTH. 

To  close  ranks. 

28.  The  manual  of* arms  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Close  order.    2.  March. 


46  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    II. 


29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  in  quick  time,  each 
man  directing  himself  on  his  file  leader. 

ARTICLE   FIFTH. 

Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed 
parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the  right  and  left,  forward  and  backward, 
observing  to  place  always  two  or  four  files  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment. 
He  will  give  the  commands  prescribed,  No.  21. 

SI.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will  superintend  the  front 
rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the^  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  them- 
selves  to  judge  the  alignment  by  the"  lines  of  the  eyes  and  shoulders,  in  cast- 
ing a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the  front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater  number  of  the  front 
rank  aligned,  he  will  command  Font,  and  rectify  afterwards,  if  necessary, 
the  alignment  of  the  other  men  by  the  means  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  32<>.  The  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front 
rank,  superintended  by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank 
to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers 
accurately  his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  observe  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed 
the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without  deranging  the  align- 
ment, will  first  cause  arms  to  be  supported,  or  ordered,  and  then  command  : 

In  place — Rest. 

33.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be  constrained  to  preserve 
silence  or  steadiness  of  position:  but  they  will  always  keep  one  or  other  heel 
on  the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish  to  rest  the  men  without 
constraining  them  to  preserve  the  alignment,  he  will  command: 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  immo- 
bility, or  to  remain  in  their  places.  „ 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  judge  proper,  cause  arms  to 
be  stacked,  which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 

LESSON  SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second  lesson,  will  cause  the 
company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks  have  been  formed,  and  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Shoulder — ARMS. 

* 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  firings  to  be  executed  in 
the  following  order : 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    II.  47 


ARTICLE      FIRST. 

To  load  in  four  times  and  at  icill. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  251,  and  following.  The  instructor  will 
cause  this  exercise  to  be  ofte*  repeated,  in  succession,  before  passing  to  load- 
ing at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will,  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  256.  In  priming  when  loading  in  four  times,  and 
also  at  will,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  half  face  to  the  right  with 
the  men,  and  face  to  the  front  when  the  men  next  to  them,  respectively, 
.brings  his  piece  to  the  shoulder. 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause  the  men,  in  the  differ- 
ent loadings,  to  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
Nos.  257  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  consequently  the  one  with 
which  it  is  most  important  to  render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference 
in  the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be  well  established  in  the  principles. 
To  these  they  will  be  brought  by  degrees,  so  that  every  man  may  be  able  to 
load  with  cartridges,  and  to  tire  at  least  three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  ease 
and  regularity. 

ARTICLE       SECOND. 
To  fire  by  company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company  to  be  executed  , 
will  command: 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.   Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly  place  himself  oppo- 
site the  centre  of  his  company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file 
closers:  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place  himself  op- 
posite to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general,  for  both  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant,  in  all  the  different  firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add:  I.  Company;  2. 
Ready;  3.  Aim;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their  pieces,  and  then  take 
the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the  firing,  by  the  com- 
mands : 

1.  Company.     2.  Aim.     3.  FiRE.  ,  4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  coutiuued  until  the  signal  to  cease  firing  is 
sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right  and 
left  simply  observing  to  pronounce  right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the  com- 
mand aim. 

ARTICLE     THIRD. 


The  fire  by  file. 


48  SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY — LESSON    11. 


55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  % e  by  file  to  be  executed,  will 
command: 

1.  Fire  by  fie.     2.  Company.     3.  Ready.     4.  Commence  firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  275  and  following.       ♦ 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the  company ;  the  next 
file  will  take  aim  at  the  instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  so 
on  to  the  left ;  but  this  progression  will  only  be  observed,  in  the  first  dis- 
charge, after  which  each  man  will  re-load  and  fire  without  regulating  himself 
by  others,  conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, No.  280. 

ARTICLE     FOURTH. 

The  fire  by  rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be  executed,  wiil  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Company.     3.  Ready.     4.  Rear  rank— Aim.     5.  FlRE. 

6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed  as  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285  and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the  rear  rank  at  a  ready, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate  ranks,  until  the  signal  is 
given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the  right  and 
left,  cor  forming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  whether  by  company,  by 
file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  and  at  the  instant  this 
sound  commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire,  coniorming  to  what  is  prescrib- 
ed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  282. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  followed  by  a  bugle  note;  at 
which  sound,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their 
places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  ranks 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used,  the  signal  to  cease  firing 
will  be  indicated  by  the  command  cease  firing,  which  will  be  pronounced-by 
the  instructor  when  he  wishes  the  semblance  of  firing  to  cease. 

66.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  substituted,  under  similar  circum- 
stances, for  the  bugle  note  employed  as  the  signal  for  the  return  of  the  cap- 
tain and  covering  sergeant  to  their  places  in  line,  which  command  will  be 
given  when  the  instructor  sees  the  men  have  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoul- 
der. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently  used  against  an 
enemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the 
troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost  exclusive  preference, 
and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim  with  care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some 
particular  object.  As  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men  should  aim 
with  precision  in  battle,  this  principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises 
for  purposes  of  instruction. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSOX    II.  49 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  fire  bij  the  rear  rani:. 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  executed  to  the  rear, 
that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command: 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     2.   Company.     3.   About — FACE. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  and  place  himself  near 
to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of «his  company;  lUo  covering  sergeant,  and  file 
closers,  will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain'a^Lnterval,  and  place  themselves 
faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the 
file  closers  two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line, 
each  passing  behind  liie  covering  sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  -the  last  file 
closer  shall  have  passed  through  the  interval,  the  Company  will  face  about; 
the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become 
the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear. 

?].  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  instructor  will  cause 
it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company,  both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  file,  and 
the  fire  bj  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  in  the  three  preced- 
ing articles;  the  captain,  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform  them- 
selves, in  like  manner,  to  what  is  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the  company,  now  become 
the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank,  the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank, 
new  become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  About — FACE. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering  sergeant  and  file  closers 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  69  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced  about,  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the  men  the  importance 
of  aiming  always  at  some  particular  object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Xo.  17- 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to  make  a  short  pause 
between  the  commands  aim  and  fire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accu- 
racy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to  see  the  two  ranks,  in 
order  to  detect  faults ;  he  will  charge  the  captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally 
watchful,  and  to  report  to  him  when  the  ranks  are  at  rest.  He  will  remand, 
for  individual  instruction,  the  men  who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers,  in  the  firings,  "the  high- 
est degree  of  composure  or  presence  of  mind;  he  will  neglect  nothing  that 
may  contribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principle,  to  maintain,  in  the 
direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the  alignment  of  the  ranks 
and  files  may  not  be  deranged;  and  he  will  verify,  by  examination,  after  each 
exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this  principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  obsene,  in  addition  to  these  remarks  all  those 
which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it  is  particularly  recom- 
mended that  the  men  observe,  in  uncocking,  whether  smoke  escapes  from  the 
tube,  which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been  discharged;  but  if, 


50  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    III. 

on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapes,  the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  re- 
loading, will  pick  and  prime  again.  If,  believing  the  load  to  be  discharged, 
the  soldier  should  put  a  second  cartridge  in  his  piece,  he  ought,  at  least,  to 
perceive  it  in  ramming,  by  the  height  of  the  load;  and  he  would  be  very  cul- 
pable, should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instructor  will  always  cause  arms  to  be 
inspected  after  firing  with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault  has  been 
committed,  of  putting  three  cartridges,  without  a  discharge,  in  the  same 
piece,  in  which  case  the  ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed  fire,  that  the  tube  is 
found  stopped  up  with  a  hard,  white,  and  compact  powder;  in  this  case,  pick- 
ing will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new  cap  substituted  for  the  old  one. 

LESSON  THIRD. 

ARTICLE    FIRST. 

To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  exercise  it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure 
himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  are  perfectly 
in  the  direction  of  their  respective  ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately 
covers  the  captain;  the  instructor  will  then  place  himself  twenty-five  or 
thirty  paces  in  front  of  them,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing  file,  will  command: 

1.  Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will  move  six  paces  in  ad- 
vance of  the  captain ;  the  instructor,  from  the  position  prescribed,  will  cor- 
rectly align  this  sergeant  on*the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file. 

87  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged  with  the  direction,  will, 
the  moment  his  position  is  assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the 
straight  line  which  would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heels  of  his  in- 
structor. 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside,  and  com- 
mand :  / 

2.  March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with  life.  The  directing  sergeant 
will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step, 
inarching  on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen;  he  will  take  in  succession,  and 
always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the  point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  ad- 
vance, exactly  in  the  same  line  with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some 
fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The  captain  will  march  steadily  in 
the  trace  of  the  directing  sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him ;  the 
men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
his  neighbor  on  the  side  of  direction,  and  conform  himself  to  the  principles 
prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by  the  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain,  will  take  special  care  not  to  pass  him  ; 
to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in 
the  same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers,  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance  of  two  paces  bo- 
hind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  command: 

To  Me— Step. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    III.  51 


93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards  the  directing  sergeant, 
retake  the  step  from  him,  and  again  direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  to  be  post- 
ed sometimes  on  the  right,  and  sometimes.on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the  greatest  influence  on 
the  march  of  the  company,  he  will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step, 
his  habit  of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given  line  of  direc- 
tion, and  of  prolonging  that  line  without  variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  these  principles,  undulations  in 
the  front  of  the  company  must  necessarily  follow;  the  men  will  be  unable  to 
contract  the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness,  and  of  main- 
taining their  shoulders  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction — the  only  means 
of  attaining  perfection  in  the  march  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  establish  the  men  in  the 
length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line,  will 
cause  the  company*  to  advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces,  at  once,  without 
halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit.  In  the  first  exercises,  he  will  march  the 
company  with  open  ranks,  the  better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see  with  care,  that  all  the  principles  of  the  march 
in  line  are  strictly  observed ;  he  will  generally  be  on  the  directing  flank,  in  a 
position  to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and  the  faults  they  may  commit ;  he  will 
sometimes  halt  behind  the  directing  file  during  some  "thirty  successive  steps, 
in  order  to  judge  whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file,  deviate 
from  the  perpendicular. 

ARTICLE   SECOND. 

To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and  to  align  it. 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  will  command  : 

1.   Company.     2.  HALT. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ;  the  directing  ser- 
geant will  remain  in  advance,  unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of  file 
closers.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  advance  the  first 
three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direction,  and  align  the  company  on  that  basis, 
or  he  may  confine  himself  to  causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this 
last  case,  he  will  command:  Captain,  rectify  the  alignment.  The  captain  will 
direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when  each,  glancing 
his  eyes  along  his  rank,  will  promptly  rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  320." 

ARTICLE   THIRD. 

Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  for  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  oblique  step.  The 
men  will  accurately  observe  the  principles"  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  331.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve  their  distances,  and  march 
in  rear  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  (or  left)  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march  to  lie  resumed,  he  will 
command: 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 


52  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    III. 


104.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  resume  the  direct  march. 
The  instructor  will  move  briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and 
facing  the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
captain  and  covering  sergeant ;  and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing 
sergeant  on  the  same  line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it;  the  latter  will  immedi- 
ately take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  instructor,  and 
as  he  advances,  will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  No.  *9. 

305.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the  touch  of  elbows,  the 
guide  will  always  be  on  the  side  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  without 
any  indication  to  that  effect  being  given;  and  when  the  direct  march  is  resum- 
ed, the  guide  will  be,  equally  without  indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was 
previous  to  the  oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique  to  be  made  towards  the 
side  of  the  guide.  He  will  also  direct  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the 
directing  sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the  same  perpendicular  line  to  the 
front  with  him,  while  following  a  parallel  direction. 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  instructor  will  be  watchful 
that  the  men  follow  parallel  directions,  in  conforming  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for  preserving  the  general  alignment ; 
whenever  the  men  lose  the  alignment,  he  will  be  careful  that  they  regain  it 
by  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or  chang- 
ing the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  company  and  face  to 
it,  in  order  to  regulate  the  march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who 
is  on  the  flank  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and  to  see  that  the  princi- 
ples of  the  march  are  properly  observed,  and  that  the  files  do  not  crowd. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  back  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and  in  quick  time,  the  in- 
structor, to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Double  quick.     2.  MARCH. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  either  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Quick  time.     2.     MARCH. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  either  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  cause  it  to  march  in 
,  the  back  step ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command ; 


I.  Company  backward.    2.  March. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    III.  53 


116  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier  No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor 
will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be  taken  in  succession, 
and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  company  in  marching  in 
double  quick  time,  till  the  men  are  well  established  in  the  length  and  swiftness 
of  the  pace  in  quick  time  ;  he  will  then  endeavor  To  render  the  march  of  one 
hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the  minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also 
cause  them  to  observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure  of  mind,  as 
if  inarching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a  subdivision  (in  a  column) 
has  to  change  direction  by  turning,  or  has  to  form  into  line,  the  men  will 
quicken  the  pace  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  stops  in  a  minute.  The  same 
swiftness  of  step  will  be  observed  under  all  circumstances  whore  groat  ra- 
pidity of  movement  is  required.  But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any 
Length  of  tim€  at  bo  swift  a  rate,  without  breaking  or  confusion,  this  accelera- 
tion will  not  be  considered  a  prescribed  exercise,  and  accordingly  companies 
or  battalions  will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in  the  double  quick  time  of  one 
hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the  minute. 

AllTICLE  Fifth. 

To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command: 

1.  Company.      2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  will  place  him- 
self in  front  of  the  directing  file,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  84. 

12J.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
directing  file,  will  command  : 

3.   Company,  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, Nos.  86  and  87,  with  this  difference — he  will  place  himself  six  paces 
in  front  of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  opposite 
to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  be- 
come the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

4.  March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  men,  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  89,  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching  in  retreat,  all 
that  is  prescribed  for  marching  in  advance  ;  the  commands  and  the  means  of 
execution  will  be  the  same; 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will,  when  he  may  wish, 
cause  it  to  face  to  the  front  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  119.  The  cap- 
tain, the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  directing  sergeant,  will  resume  their 
habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment  they  shall  have  faced  about. 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank,  if  the  instructor 

4 


54  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    IV. 


should  wish  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  cause  the   right  about  to  be  exe- 
cuted while  marching,  and  to  this  effect  will  command : 

I.  Company.    2.  Right  about.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly  face  about,  and 
recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the  company,  and  will 
move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of  the  file  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation 
of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will  place  him  in  the  proper  direction  by  the 
means  prescribed  No.  104.  The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men, 
will  conform  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to  march  by  the  front  rank, 
he  will  give  the  same  commands,  and  will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march 
by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  all  the 
movements  prescribed  in  the  3d,  4th,  5th,  and  6th  lessons  of  this  school,  with 
the  exception  of  the  march  backwards,  which  will  be  executed  only  in  quick 
time.  He  will  give  the  same  commands,  observing  to  add  double  quick  before 
the  command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoulder,  in  quick  time,  the 
distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  therefore,  the 
instructor  brings  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to  this  position,  the  rear  rank 
must  shorten  a  little  the  first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,, 
and  will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order  to  close  up  when  the 
pieces  are  again  brought  to  a  shoulder.  In  marching  in  double  quick  time, 
the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches,  and  the  pieces  will 
be  carried  habitually  on  the  right  shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  at 
once  to  a,  shoulder  at  the  command  halt.  The  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper 
distance.      These  rules  are  general. 

LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article  First. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  right  flank,  he  will  command : 

1.  Company,  right — FACE.     2.  Forward.     3.  MARCH. 

136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain 
having  stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the  side  of  the 
sergeant,  and  on  his  left ;  the  front  rank  will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  352  ;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  side  step 
to  the  right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the  same  manner;  so  that  when  the 
movement  is  completed,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and 
elbow  to  elbow.     The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to  the  right,  so  that  when 
the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  off  briskly  in  quick 
time ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on 
his  left,  will  march  straight  forward.    The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast 


-0 

a.                        .    M  •  *4,     f  # . 

r 

T         !   i   i   j  J 

i 

Q         ,   , 

^         IILU 

£2         ^-UJ 

rrm 

M        I  1 '  I  U 

LU1U 

':         ffiiiQCji 

EEtO 

>               •                                                        tEKO 

;   E33 

as             :      :        ■ 

II  °  s  ™ 

p:;|  j     m 

1     *5 : 

1                       :    1 

1 

\ 

V 

•*> 

it 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    IV.  55 


of  their  respective  front  rank  men,  heads  direct  to  the  front ;  the  file  closers 
will  march  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  to 
be  observed,  in  placing  himself,  pending  the  march,  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier  No.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left  flank  to  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right ;  the  ranks  will  double  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  for  the  soldier,  No.  354 ;  the  rear  rank  will 
side-step  to  the  left  one  pace  before  doubling. 

14  J.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  left  guide  will  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank ;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the 
left,  and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  guide  :  the  covering  sergeant 
will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go 
to  the  left. 

Article  Second. 

To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  either  in  march,  or  at  a 
halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  file,  left,  (or  right.)    2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel;  if  to  the  side  of  the 
front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describe  a 
short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the  first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to 
give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement. 
If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel 
in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself 
to  the  movement  by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  explained. 
Each  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  where  that  which  preceded 
it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  executed  according  to  these 
principles,  in  order  that  the  distance  between  the  files  may  always  be  pre 
served,  and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hindrance  at  the  wheeling  point. 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  359  and  360.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubted, 
the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant, as  well  as  the  left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return 
to  their  habitual  places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by  one  of  the  means  pre- 
scribed, No.  100. 

Article  FolVth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form    it  on  the  right  (or  left) 
by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  On  the  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  MARCH. 


56  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    IV. 


149.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled  will  mark  time  ; 
the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight 
f,  rward,  and  be  halted  by  the  instructor  when  they  shall  have  passed  at  least 
six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers;  the  captain  will  place  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the 
front  rank  successively  arrive;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  behind 
the  captain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank;  the  two  men  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to  march,  and  parsing  beyond  the  covering 
Bergeant  and  the  captain,  will  turn  to  the  right ;  after  turning,  they  will  con- 
tinue to  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  themselves  towards  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, but  when  they  shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number 
will  shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd  nu#nber  may  precede  him  on  the  line,  the 
odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on  the  left  of  the  captain;  the  even 
number  will  afterwards  oblique  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
odd  number;  the  next  two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the 
same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves, 
according  to  the  means  just  explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the 
two  men  already  established  on  the  line  ;  the  remaining  files  of  this  rank  will 
follow  in  succession,  and  be  formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear 
rank  doubled  will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner  already  explained  for 
the  front  rank,  taking  care  not  to  commence  the  movement  until  four  men  of 
the  front  rank  are  established  on  the  line  of  battle;  the  rear  rank  men, as  they 
arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately  their  file  leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause 
it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right.  In 
this  case,  the  odd  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  so  that  the  even  numbers 
may  precede  them  on  the  line.  The  captain,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  by  or- 
der of  the  instructor,  after  the  company  shall  be  formed  and  aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend  the  mechanism  of  this 
movement,  the  instructor  will  at  first  cause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by 
each  rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks  united  and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  without  the 
point  wThere  the  right  or  left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to  establish  the  base  of  the 
alignment,  and  afterwards,  he  will  follow  up  the  movement  to  assure  himself 
that  each  file  conforms  itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  149. 

Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by  company,  or  by  platoon, 
into  line,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left    in  marching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructor  will 
order  the  captain  to  form  it  into  line  ;  the  captain  will  immediately  command  : 

1.  By  company,  into  line.     2.  March. 

154.  The  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will  continue  to  march 
straightforward;  the  men  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double 
quick  step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  care  to  undouble 
the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in  line  with  the  covering 
Bergeant,  they  will  take  from  him  the  step,  and  then  turn  their  eyes  to  the 
front. 

.  156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  movements  of  their  re- 
spective file  leaders,  but  without  endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same  time 
with  the  latter. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY LESSON    IV.  57 


157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain  will  face  to  his  com- 
pany in  order  to  follow  up  the  execution;  and,  as  soon  as  the  company  is  form- 
ed, he  will  command,  guide  left,  place  himself  two  paces  before  the  centre,  face 
to  the  front,  aud  take  the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant  will  promptly  place 
himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left,  to  serve  as  guide,  aud  the  covering  ser- 
geant who  is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank,  this  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles;  the 
company  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command  guide  right,  and  place  him- 
self in  front  of  his  company  as  abovef  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on 
the  left  flank  will  remain  there. 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left  in  front,  the  covering  ser- 
geant and  the  second  sergeant  of  each  company  will  always  be  placed  on  the 
righl  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank;  they  will  be  denominated  right 
guide  and  left  guide,  and  the  one  or  the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  iu- 
trnctor  to  cause  it  to  form  platoons,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  effect  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon  according  to  the 
above  principles.  The  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second,  passing  through 
the  opening  made  in  the  centre  of  the  company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right 
flank,  and  around  the  left  of  his  platoon,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left:  in  this 
last  case,  the  captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left  of  the  second  platoon  in  or- 
der to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and  lieutenant, 
without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide  left  (or  right)  at  the  in- 
stant their  respective*  platoons  are  formed. 

163.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right),  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will 
pass  rapidly  to  the  indicated  flank  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always  serve  as  the  guide  of  the 
right  or  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve, 
in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 

165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  one  guide  to  each  pla- 
toon ;  he  will  always  be  placed  on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  on 
the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  follow  the  platoons  to  which 
they  are  attached. 

167.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company,  inarching  by  the  flank,  to 
form  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  by  his  own  direct  commands,  using 
those  prescribed  for  the  captain,  No.  153  or  161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in  passing,  without  a  halt, 
from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally.  In 
either  case,  he  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  sol- 
dier, No.  363,  substituting  company  for  squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the 
right  or  left,  in  marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides,  and  file  closers  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  for  each  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  or 
in  j  the  inarch  by  the  front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a  subdivision  of  a 
column. 

16  >.  If,  after  facing  to  the  light  or  left,  in  marching,  the  company  find  it- 
self faced  by  the  rear  lank,  the  capt.in  wi  1  place  himself  two  paces  behind 
the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the  guides  will  pass  to  the  rear 
rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file  closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.    The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the  men,  and  to  prevent 


58  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 

them  from  being  negligent  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes  or- 
der support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and  arms  on  the  right  shoulder, 
when  marching  in  line. 

LESSON   FIFTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt  or  in  march. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the  instructor,  wishing 
to  break  it  into  column,  by  platoon  to  the  right,  will  command: 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  rapidly  place  them- 
selves two  paces  before  the  centres  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant 
passing  around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need  not  occupy  themselves 
with  dressing,  one  upon  the  other.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the 
captain  in  the  front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  platoon  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  standing  fast;  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the 
marching  flank  will  rest  when  the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  late 
rear,  and  place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the 
right  (who  had  faced),  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied  by  the  company 
in  line  of  battle;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  march- 
ing flank  shall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.      2.  JlALT. 

174.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  man  who 
conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpen- 
dicular, the  platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move  to  the  point 
where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank;  the 
second  sergeant  will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second 
platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between  himself  and  the  man  on  the 
right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal  to  its  front;  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant 
will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and 
the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established  on  the  perpendicu- 
lar, each  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  facing  to- 
wards him  will  command: 

3.  Left—  Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement  of  their  re- 
spective platoons,  preserving  always  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear 
rank, 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles.     The  instructor  will  command : 

U  By  platoon,  left  wheel.    2.  March. 


ffl  0 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.  59 


179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  if  break- 
ing by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  platoon  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
conform  to  the  principles  indicated  Nos.  173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each  platoon,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  second 
sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  will  each  move  to  the  points 
where  the  right  of  his  platoon  is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  platoon  should 
be  careful  to  align  the  sergeant  between  himsolf  and  the  man  of  the  platoon 
who  had  faced  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command : 

Right— Dress. 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its  centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by  platoon  to  the  right, 
and  to  move  the  column  forward  after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will  caution  the 
company  to  that  effect,  and  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  move  rapidly  in  front 
of  their  respective  platoons,  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  172, 
and  will  remain  in  this  position  during  the  continuance  of  the  wheel.  The 
covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  right,  conform- 
ing to  the  principles  herein  prescribed;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not  face  to 
the  right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming  himself  to  the  movement  of  the 
marching  flank  ;  and  when  the  man  who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive 
near  the  perpendicular,  the  instructor  will  command: 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.      5.  Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel 
is  completed,  the  platoons  will  move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  ser- 
geant will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  former 
passing  before  the  front  rank.  The  leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points 
on  the  ground  in  the  direction  which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  in- 
structor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  lightly 
to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose  his  distance,  or  the  line 
of  direction,  he  will  conform  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  Nos.  202  and 
203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  break  by  platoon  to  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the  manner  already  explained;  the 
man  on  the  pivot  will  take  care  to  mark  time  in  his  place,  without  advancing 
or  receding  ;  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  Nos.  184  and  following. 

19U.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means,  the  instructor  giving  the  commands 
prescribed  Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  right,  and  reciprocally. 

191.    The  movements  explained  in  Mos.  183  and  189  will  only  be  executed 


60  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 


after  the  company  has  become  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  march 
in  column,  Articles  Second  and  Third. 

Remarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company,  will  observe  whether 
the  movement  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above; 
whether  the  platoons,  after  breaking  into  column,  are  perpendicular  to  the 
line  of  battle  just  occupied  ;  and  whether  the  guide,  who  placed  himself  where 
the  marching  flank  of  his  platoon  had  to  rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  (or  left,)  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the 
front  of  the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rearmost  guide  should  not  ac- 
curately cover  the  leading  one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct  his  position  till  the 
column  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  instructor,  wishing  to  wheel  immediately 
into  line,  should  think  it  necessary  to  rectify  the  direction  of  the  guides,  which 
would  be  executed  as  will  be  hereinafter  explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this 
lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the  man  on  the  right  (or  left)  of 
each  platoon,  who,  at  the  command  march,  faces  to  the  right  (or  left)  being 
the  true  pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him  ought  to  gain  a 
little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheeling,  so  as  to  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Article  Second. 

To  march  in  column. 

195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  for  left)  in  front,  the 
instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  column  to  march,  will  throw  himself  twenty- 
five  or  thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  himself  correctly,  on 
their  direction,  and  caution  the  leading  guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the  leading  platoon 
will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his 
own  and  the  heels  of  his  instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside,  and 
command : 

1.  Column,  forward.    2.  Guide  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off,  by  a  decided  step,  their  respective 
platoons,  in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly,  and  at  the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  towards  the 
guide,  and  conform  himself,  in  marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  327.  The  man  next  to  the  guide,  in  each  platoon, 
will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to 
the  right  (or  left)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the  direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the  length 
and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  maintain  the  direction  of  his  march  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  leading 
one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal  to 
the  front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step  with  the  leading 
guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from  the  one  leading,  (which 
can  only  happen  by  his  own  fault,)  he  will  correct  bimself  by  slightly  length- 
ening or  shortening  a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quick- 
enings  or  slackenings  in  the  march  of  his  platoon. 


• 

>M*  ^l**  —    **" '    ' — L~' — ' — ' 

.Krr^rrr- 

teJL    ' 

!     si 

T 

cu 

pei  - 1   ; '  r 

.1  T  -T 

I'll  1 

e.  im,vt 

1      1  % 

J3    I  '!    ' 

h 

ZS 

^ 

o> 


4 

1      n              ^ 

■□   ... 

U 
1    K]      -G 

: 
jj 

H                         ! 

,-| 

]  ■       : 

-     -y 

SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSOX    V.  61 


203  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  preceding  one,  find  himself  sensibly  out  of  the  direction,  he  will  remedy 
this  fault  by  advancing  more  or  less  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  true  direc- 
tion, and  thus,  in  a  few  steps,  insensibly  regain  it,  without  the  inconvenience 
of  the  oblique  step,  which  would  cause  a  loss  of  distance.  In  all  cases,  each 
chief  of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform  to  the  movements  of  its  guide. 

Remarks  on  the  march  in  column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect  to  lead  off  and  to  de- 
cide the  march  from  the  first  step,  the  march  will  be  begun  in  uncertainty, 
which  will  cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  and  a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the  march  of  his  subdivision, 
anil  that  which  follows  will  be  uncertain;  Chore  will  be  undulations,  quicken- 
in§B,  and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  he  not  habituated  to  prolong  a  given  direction,  with- 
out deviation,  he  will  describe  a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to 
conform  itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to  march  in  the  trace  of  the 
preceding  one,  he  will  lose  his  distance  at  every  moment  in  endeavors  to  re- 
gain the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is  the  most  important  principle  in 
the  march  in  column. 

203.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will  be  responsible  for  the 
direction,  distance,  hud  step :  the  chief  of  the  subdivision,  for  the  order  and 
conformity  of  his  division  with  the  movements  of  the  guide.  Accordingly,  the 
chief  will  frequently  turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

•21)!).  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the  guides,  will  watch  over  the 
execution  of  all  the  principles  prescribed  ;  he  will,  also,  sometimes  place  him- 
self in  the  rear,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  ami  halt,  pending  some  thirty 
paces  together,  to  verify  the  accuracy  of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always  repeat,  with  the  greatest 
promptitude,  the  commands  march  and  halt,  no  chief  waiting  for  another,  but 
each  repeating  the  command  the  moment  he  catches  it  from  the  instructor. 
They  will  repeat  no  other  command  given  by  him  ;  but  will  explain,  if  neces- 
sary, to  their  subdivisions,  in  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to 
execute,  as  indicated  by  the  commands  of  caution. 

• 

Article  Third. 

To  change  direction. 

211.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  marching,  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march. 
Whenever,  therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the  instructor  will 
change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there,  to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  which 
the  change  is  to  be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  in- 
structor to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at 
which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made;  the  instructor  or  marker,  will 
place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that 
flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  that  person,  so  that  in 
passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze  his  breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall 
have  approached  near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  platoon  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Right  wheel.      2.  March. 


62  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 


214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon  is  at  the  distance 
of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  the 
guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command: 

•  3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed  as  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  398  and  399.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon 
will  take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction,  in  order  the  better  to  regu- 
late the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward  till  up 
with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  retake  the  direct 
march  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  governed  the  first 
platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  he  will  command,  guide  right.  At  this 
command,  the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective 
platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  subdivision  ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch 
of  elbows  to  the  right;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles  as  the  change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse 
means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand, guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick -time,  the  platoons  will  wheel 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  formations  in  line,  which  can 
be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  some- 
times cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  In  this 
case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon  will  command:  Left  for  right)  turn, 
instead  of  left  (or  right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn,  in  succession, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  The 
leading  guide,  as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground,  the 
better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  distances  and  the  direc- 
tion, that  all  the  subdivisions  of  the  column  should  change  direction  precisely 
at  the  point  where  the  leading  subdivision  changed;  it  is  for  this  reason  that 
that  point  ought  to  be  marked  in  advance,  and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the 
guides  direct  their  march  on  the  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  subdivision 
shall  not  cause  the  change  to  commence  till  the  guide  of  his  subdivision  has 
gi-azed  the  breast  of  this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision  arrives  at  the  point  of 
change  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction :  with  this  veiw,  he  will  face  to 
his  subdivision  when  the  one  which  precedes  has  commenced  to  turn  or  to 
wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  it  continues  to  march  squarely  until  it  ar- 
rives at  the  point  where  the  change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the  subdivision  which  wheels 
should  not  clear  the  wheeling  point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be  arrested 
and  distances  lost;  for  the  guide  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  having  to 
describe  an  arc,  in  length  about  a  half  greater  than  the  front  of  the  subdi- 
vision, the  second  subdivision  would  be  already  up  with  the  wheeling  point, 
whilst  the  first  which  wheels  has  yet  the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and  hence 
would  be  obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed.     It  is  therefore 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.  63 


prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdivision  should  take  steps  of  nine  or 
eleven  inches  in  length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  iu  order  not  to 
arrest  the  march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look 
well  to  the  step  of  the  pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened 
as  may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of  this  movement,  the  centre  of 
each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little,  to  the  rear. 

228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step, 
whether  the  change  of  direction  be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the  opposite 
side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will  always  present  his 
breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column.  The  instructor  will  take  the  greatest 
pains  in  causing  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  observed ;  he  will  see  that 
each  subdivision  only  commences  the  change  of  direction  when  the  guide, 
grazing  the  breast  of  the  marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and,  that  the  march- 
ing flank  does  not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle,  in  order  that  it  may 
not  be  thrown  beyond  the  new  direction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of  the  wheeling  flank  will 
cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground  at  the  moment  of  commencing  the  wheel,  and 
will  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  equal  to  the  front  of  the  sub- 
division. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  halt  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  halt  it, 
he  will  command: 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  column  will  halt ;  the  guides  also  will  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have 
lost  both  distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  repeated  with  the  greatest  vivacity,  and 
executed  at  the  same  instant,  distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  bis  distance,  seek  to  recover  it  after  that  com- 
mand, he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  have 
marched  well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper  distance;  and  if  the  latter  re- 
gain what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement  will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of 
the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either 
at  a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column,  right  in  front,  and  wishing 
to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of 
the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the 
guide  beyond;  which  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

Left— Dress. 

236.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
each  of  them  will  place  himself  briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and 
direct  the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction  of  the 
column. 


64  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    V. 


237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  command  Front,  and  re- 
turn quickly  to  his  place  in  column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will  command: 

I.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  MARCH. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his 
breast :  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  the 
platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in 
conformity  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon 
to  observe  its  movement,  and  when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near 
the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  HALT. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flank  of  the 
platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted  it,  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  tile  closer,  passing  around  the  left  of  his  subdivision.    ' 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  com- 
mand: 

Right— Dress. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment ; 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  op- 
posite the  instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  this  officer.  The  captain  will  direct  the 
alignment  from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 

245-     The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of  battle,  will  command: 
Guides— Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  the  captain,  and 
the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  form 
it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  place  himself  at  platoon  disranee_  in 
front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position 
of  the  guide  beyondi  which  being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel.     2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm 
of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right, 
and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near 
the  line  of  battle;  for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command: 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flank  of  the 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    V.  65 


platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle.     The  chief  of  the  second  platoon 
having  halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  briskly  to  the 
point  at  which  the  left  of  the  company  will  rest,  and  command: 

Left— Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment; 
the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  opposite  the  instructor,  will  place 
his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  officer,  and  the  captain  will  di- 
rect the  alignmeuU'rom  the  left  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  com- 
pany. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 

Guides— POSTS. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the  right  of  his  company, 
the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or  right  dress,  previous  to 
commanding  left  or  right  into  li»r.  wheel,  unless,  after  rectifying  the  position  of 
the  guides, it  should  heroine  necessary  to  dress  the  platoons,  or  one  of  them, 
laterally  to  the  right  or  Left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or  right)  into  line,  wheel, 
will  assure  himself  that  the  rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling  distance 
from  the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is  important,  in  order  to  detect  negli- 
gence on  the  part  of  guides  in  this  essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  he  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the  com- 
mands prescribed  Xo  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the 
leading  guide. 

253.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the 
left  guides  will  halt  short,  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  pla- 
toons, will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  239  and  following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  formation  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

2G0.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  and  to  march  the  com- 
pany in  line  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoons  left  ichcel.     2.  MARCH. 

2C1.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoon, 
the  left  guides  will  halt  »  the  man  next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will 
mark  time:  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles 
of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When  the  right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive 
near  the  line  of  battle,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Foricard.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left.) 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed. 
all  the  men  of  the  company' will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches  ;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  the  covering  ser- 
geant, and  the  left  guide  will  take  their  positions  as  in  line «of  battle. 


66  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  immediately  after  the 
fourth,  the  captain  and  covering  'sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move 
briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The  non-commissioned 
officer  charged  with  the  direction  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  and 
will  be  assured  in  his  line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is  prescribed  No.  104. 
That  non-commissoned  officer  will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground  as 
indicated  in  the  same  number.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in 
line.  • 

264.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column  left  in  front. 

LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  First. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step,  and  supposed  to  make 
part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
break  by  platoon,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 
1.  Break  into  platoons,  and  immediately  place  himself  before  the  centre  of 
the  first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieutenant  will  pass 
quickly  around  the  left  to  the  centre  of  his  platoon,  and  give  the  caution : 
Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command  :    2.  March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ;  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  f  passing  by  the 
front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  second  platoon  will 
begin  to  mark  time ;  its  chief  will  immediately  add:  1.  Right  oblique;  2. 
March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this  platoon  may  commence 
obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The 
men  will  shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  command  forward 
march  is  given,  the  platoon  may  have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the  direction  of  the  guide 
of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command  Forward,  and  add  March, 
the  instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break  into  platoons  by 
inverse  means,  applying  to  the  first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  second,  and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  shift  to  the  right  flank 
of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  of 
the  first. 

To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in  front,  when  "the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command  :  Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain,  will  immediately  add:  1. 
First  platoon;  2.   Right  oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to  continue  to  march 
straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command  :  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  second,  the  first  pla- 
toon will  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  unmask*the  second  ;  the  covering 
sergeant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to  the  right  of  the  com- 
pany, passing  by  th£  front  rank. 


J^JL. 


K8HHBHBBHHHHBB 

a 

,,„  ,      |, 

&          - 

A 

• 

Oi.-J 



Mb 


£a  fc*   b 


BCBCJKZMZEa 


■^^>v 


J>        £       ® 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY LESSON  VI.  67 


278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  unmasked  the  second,  the 
captain  will  command  :  1.  Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall 
be  complete,  he  will  add :  2.  March.  The  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to 
oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  meantime  the  second  platoon  will  have  continued  to  march 
straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain 
will  command  Forward,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  platoons  shall  unite,  add 
March;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement  will  be  executed  by 
inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  giving  the  command  Forward, 
and  the  captain  adding  the  command  March,  when  the  platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will  pass  to  its  left 
flank  the  moment  the  platoon  begins  to  oblique ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its 
right,  remaining  on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the  company  to  break  and 
re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his  own  direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give 
the  general  commands  prescribed  for  the  captain  above;  1.  Break  into  pla- 
toons ;  2.  March;  and  1.  Form  company ;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the  subdivision  that  breaks 
off  should  mark  time  too  long,  it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions, 
arrest  the  march  of  the  following  one,  which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of 
the  column,  and  a  loss  of  distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that  the  platoons  which 
oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step  too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in 
column,  and  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it  would  be  obliged  to  oblique 
agaiu  to  the  opposite  flank,  to  regain  the  direction,  and  by  the  double  move- 
ment arrest,  probably,  the  inarch  of  the  following  subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will  face  to  their  platoons, 
in  order  to  enforce  the  observance  of  the  foregoing  principles. 

287.  "When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they  break  in  succession,  it 
is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  each  company  should  continue  to  march  in 
the  same  step,  without  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst  that  which  precedes 
breaks*  although  the  following  company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one. 
This  attention  is  essential  to  guard  against  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a  few  companies,  would 
be  serious  inconveniences  in  a  general  column  of  many  battalions.  Hence  the 
instructor  will  give  the  greatest  care  in  causing  all  the  prescribed  principles 
to  be  strictly  observed.  To  this  end,  he  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing 
flank,  the  better  to  observe  all  the  movements. 

Article  Second. 

Being  in  column,  to  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a  subdivision 
of  a  column,  right  (or  left)  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
files  to  break  off  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately 
turn  to  his  company,  and  command : 

1.   Two  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear.     2.  March- 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the  left  Cor  right)  of  the 
company  will  mark  time,  the  others  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward; 
the  two  rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  com- 
pany shall  clear  them,  move  to  the  right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder; 
the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file  from  that  flank,  the 
even  number  behind  the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  num- 


68  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 


ber ;  the  two  front  rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  move  to  the  right  when  the 
rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  the  odd  number  will  place  himself 
behind  the  first  file,  the  even  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for  this 
purpose  behind  the  odd  number.  If  the  files  are  broken*from  the  right,  the 
men  will  move  to  the  left,  advancing  the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number  of' 
the  rear  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number  of  the 
same  rank  behind  the  fourth  ;  the  even  number  of  the^  front  rank  behind  the 
first  file,  the  odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  second,  the  odd  num- 
bers for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the  even  numbers.  The  men  will  be 
careful  not  to  lose  their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two  files  from  the  sam- 
side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above  directed 

292.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  files  already  broken, 
advancing  a  little  the  outer  shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the 
right,  if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the  left,  if  the  files  are 
broken  from  the  right,  shortening,  at  the  same  time,  the  step,  in  order  to 
make  room  between  themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the 
files  last  ordered  to  the  rear ;  the  latter  will  break  by  the  same  commands 
and  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first.  The  men  who  double  should  increase 
the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from  being  lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of  a  company  by  breaking 
off  successive  groups  of  two  files,  but  the  new  files  must  always  be,  broken 
from  the  same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken  off  to  return  into  line, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  command  : 

1.   Two  files  into  line.    2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of  those  marching  by  the 
flank  will  return  briskly  into  line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of  two 
files  by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to  which  they  belong. 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch  the  observance  of  the 
principles  which  have  just  been  prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two  files  to  break  one  after 
another,  and  to  return  again  into  line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three 
groups  to  break  together,  and  for  this  purpose,  will  command:  Four  or  six 
files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear  ;  March.  The  files  designated  will  maik 
time ;  each  rank  will  advance  a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear 
rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it,  will  oblique  at  once,  and  each  group  will 
place  itself  behind  the  four  neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if 
the  movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking  care  that  the  dis- 
tances are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will,  next  order  the  captain  to  cause  two  or  three 
groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at  once,  who  turning  to  the  company,  will  com- 
mand : 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated  will  advance  the  inner 
shoulder,  move  up  and  form  on  the  flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the  guide  on  that  flank 
will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  he 
will  also  open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed  in  the  following  order  : 
the  left  files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  right  fltnk,  an  !  the  right 
files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left  flank.  Consequently,  when- 
ever there  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  subdivision,  a  file  winch  <1<«33  not  belong 
to  a  group,  it  will  be  broken  singly. 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances  in  column  that  the 
men  should  be  habituated  in  the  schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movement  of 
this  article  with  precision. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI.  69 


303.  If  new  files  broken  off  do  not  step  well  to  the  left  or  right  iu  obliquing ; 
if,  when  files  are  ordered  into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and 
precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  jwill  be  arrested  in  their  march, 
and  thereby  cause  the  column  to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  Hank  from  which  the  files 
are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of  the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  direction,  in  order  that 
the  whole  company  may  easily  pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 

Article  Third. 

To  march  the  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  movements  incident  thereto.' 

300.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hundred  and  feu  steps  in 
a  minute;  this  swiftness  will  be  habitually  maintained  in  columns  iu  route,  when 
the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  BUpposed  to  constitute1  a  subdivision 
of  a  column,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  the  route 
step,  he  will  command: 

1.  Column,  forward.     2.  Guide,  left  (or  right.)     3.  Route  step.     4.  March. 

308.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the  two  ranks  will 
step  off  together;  the  rear  rank  will  take,  in  inarching,  by  shortening  a  few 
steps,  a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches)  from  the  rank  preceding, 
which  distance  will  be  computed  from  the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the  rear  rank, 
to  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The  men,  without  further  com- 
mand, will  immediately  carry  their  arms  at  will ,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  No.  219.  They  will  no  longer  be  required  to  march  in  the  caden- 
ced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  remain  silent.  The  files  will  march  at 
ease;  but  care  will  be  taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front 
rank  from  getting  in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to 
too  great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  will  cause  it 
to  change  direction,  which  will  be  executed  without  formal  commands,  on  a 
simple  caution  from  the  captain;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up  to  change  direc- 
tion in  the  same  manner  as  the  front  rank.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  al- 
though in  the  route  step,  to  the  principles  which  have  been  prescribed  for  the 
change  in  closed  ranks,  with  this  difference  only;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead 
of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the 
wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  cause  it  to  pass  to  the  ca- 
denced  step,  the  instructor  will  first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder,  and  then  command  : 

1.   Close  order.      2.  MARCH. 

311.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the  cadenced  step,  and 
will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of  sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace,  the  instructor,  to  cause 
it  to  take  the  route  step,  will  command  : 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  will  continue  the  step  of  twen- 
ty-eight inches,  the  rear  rank  will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the 
distance  of  twenty -eight  inches  from  the  front  rank;  the  men  will  carry  their 
arms  at  will. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step,  and  the  instructor  should 
suppose  the  necessity  of  marching  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will 
command: 

5 


70  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 


1.  Company  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  By  /deleft  (or  right.)     3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  in 
marching,  the  captain  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts 
the  leading  flank:  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately  to  the  left  or  right;  all 
the  files  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide  ;  if 
there  be  files  broken  off  to  the  rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  there  re- 
spective places,  and  follow  the  movement  of  the  company. 

316.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to  be  again  formed  info 
line,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing  and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which 
will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  the  same  means,  as  if  the  com- 
pany were  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the  company  breaks  into 
platoons,  the  chief  of  each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take 
the  place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and  supposed  to  march  in 
the  route  step?  the  instructor  can  cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and  increas- 
ed, by  section,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or  more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing  front,  by  section,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  principles  indicated  for  the  same  movements  by 
platoon.  The  right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  commanded  by  the  captain  and 
first  lieutenant,  respectively;  the  left  sections,  by  the  two  next  subalterns  in 
rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  Mashing  to  diminish  by  section,  will  give  the  order  to 
the  captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March. 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each  chief  of  section  will  place 
himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  the  front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thus 
displaced,  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank :  the  file  closers  will  close  up  to 
within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in  the  column  in  route,  the 
movement  will  never  be  executed  in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the 
front  of  the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form  platoons,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section  will  place  himself  before 
its  centre,  and  the  guides  will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command 
march,  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has  beeu  prescribed  for  forming  com- 
pany. The  moment  the  platoons  are  formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections 
will  return  to  their  places  as  file  closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  executed  the  diminishing  and  in- 
creasing front  by  files,  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same 
manner,  as  if  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  When  the  company  is  broken 
into  sections,  the  subdivision  must  not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of  less  than  six 
files,  not  counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by  section,  the  instructor 
will  cause  it,  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the  same 
direction,  by  the  commands  and  the  means  indicated,  Nos.  314  and  315.  The 
moment  the  subdivision  shall  face  to  the  right  (or  left),  the  first  file  of  each 
will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right),  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direction,  and  to 
unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  subdivision  immediately  preceding.  The  file 
closers  will  take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  before  the 
union  of  the  subdivisions. 

326.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  undouble  the  files,  which  might  sometimes  be  found  necessary, 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI.  71 


he  will  inform  the  captain,  who,  after  causing  the  cadenced  step  to  be  resumed, 
and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or  supported,  will  comma  ml; 

1.  In  two  ranks,  undouble files.     2.  March. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  the  even  numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the 
left  will  place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers;  the  rear  rank  will 
gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  re-take  the  touch  of  elbows  on  the  side  of  the 
front  rank. 

398.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  it  will  be  the  even  num- 
bers who  will  continue  to  march  forward,  ami  the  odd  numbers  who  will  un- 
double. 

329,  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the  files,  he  will  give  the  order 
to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  MARCH. 

330.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double  iu  the  manner  as  explain- 
ed, when  the  company  faces  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  will 
afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

3:51.     The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  lesson  may  by  executed  in 

double  quick  time.     The  men  will  be  brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass  over  at  this 
gait  about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seven  minutes. 

'XVI.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step  shall  halt,  the  rear 
rank  will  close  up  at  the  command  halt,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  manner  they  shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention  only 
to  holding  the  muzzle  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 

Article  Fourth. 

Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  constitute  part  of  a 
column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  counter- 
march, he  will  command: 

1.   Countermarch.     2.   Company, ^right — Face.     3.  By  file  left.     4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right,  the  two 
guides  to  the  right  about;  the  captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and 
cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the 

root  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will  stand  fast;  the  company  will 
step  off  smartly;  the  first  file,  conducted  by  the  captain,  w7ill  wheel  around  the 
right  guide,  and  direct  its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind, 
and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide;  each  file  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel 
on  the  same  ground  around  the  right  guide ;  the  leading  file  having  arrived  at 
a  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front.    4.  Right— Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces  from  the  point  where 
the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 


72  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI. 


340.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the  right;  the  captain  will 
step  two  paces  outside  of  the  left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  align- 
ment, so  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between  the  two  guides  ;  the 
company  being  aligned,  he  will  command  Front,  and  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  the  company  as  if  in  column;  the  guides,  passing  along  the  front 
rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  of  that  rank. 

341.  In  a  column  by  platoon,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles  ;  the  guide  of  each  pla- 
toon will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on 
the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will  be  executed  by  in- 
veise  commands  and  means,  but  according  to  the  same  principles.  Thus,  the 
movement  will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in 
front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if  the  leftbein  front;  in  both  cases  the  subdivi- 
sions will  wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  {or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in  march,  the  instructor, 
wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right. 

344.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  shift  quickly 
to  its  right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  column  will 
continue  to  inarch  straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  command,  will  move  briskly 
to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest  in  line,  and  place 
himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which  he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that  the  guide  of  each  platoon, 
after  having  turned  to  the  right,  may  have,  at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before 
arriving  upon  that  line., 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite  to  the  instructor,  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  command:  1.  Right  turn;  and  when  exactly 
opposite  to  that  point,  he  will  add : 

,  2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  will  turn  to  the  right,  in 
conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
402.  Its  guide  will  so  direct  his  march  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  man,  next 
on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  be- 
fore its  centre :  and  when  its  guide  shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Platoon.      2.  HALT. 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the  right  of 
the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle, 
the  platoon  will  halt ;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  come  up  promptly.  The 
guide  will  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
left  files  of  his  platoon  ;  he  will  face  to  the  instructor,  who  will  align  him  on 
the  point  of  direction  to  the  left.  The  chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same 
time,  gone  to  the  point,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will,  as  soon 
as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line,  command  : 

Right— Dress. 


,                           '■*                 i_  -JJt, 

\ 

1                   jr 

P 

J 

D 

• 

-« 


SCHOOL   OF    THE    COMPANY — LESSON    VI.  73 


350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself ;  the  front  rank  man,  -who 
finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide,  will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right 
arip  of  this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from  the  right,  will  direct  the 
alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward,  until  its 
guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the  first;  it  will  then  turn  to  the 
right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march  towards  the  line  of  battle,  its 
guide  directing  himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

35'2.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant 
it  halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  three 
left  files  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its  files  in  line,  and  its 
guide  established  on  the  direction,  will  command  : 

Right— Dress. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file 
closer,  passing  around  the  left ;  the  second  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  first,  and,  when  established,  the  captain  will  command: 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

Guides— Posts. 

356.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of 
battle. 

357.  A  column,  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the  left  into  line  of 
battle,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means,  applying  to 
the  second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  reciprocally.  The 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui,  (the 
left,)  will  retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain  having  halted  the 
first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line  of  battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point  to 
align  this  platoon,  and  then  command:  Front.  At  the  command,  guides — 
posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and 
the  guides  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be  exercised,  at  the  same 
time,  in  the  school  of  the  company,  the  colonel  will  indicate  the  lesson  or 
lessons  they  are  severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  commence  by  a  bugle 
signal,  and  terminate  in  like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  tico  ranks  into  single  rank,  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in  the  manner  indicated 
No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or 
left  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  single  rank,  he  will 
command : 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.    2.  March. 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face  to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  right  guide  will  step  off  and  march  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  front  rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time  with  the  guide ;  the  front 
rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at  the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  him- 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  VI. 


self  followed  by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  come  to  turn  on  the 
same  spot  where  he  had  turned.  The  second  file,  and  successively  all  the 
other  files,  will  step  off  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front  rank 
man  of  each  file  following  immediately  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  file  next  on 
his  right.  The  Qaptain  will  superintend  the  movement,  and  when  the  last 
man  shall  have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  two  paces  in 
rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Company  right — Face.     3.  March. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right ;  the  right 
guide  and  the  man  on  the  right  will  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

366.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have  faced  to  the  right,  will 
step  off,  and  form  files  in  the  following  manner:  the  second  man  in  the  rank 
will  place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file;  the  third  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in  the  front  rank ;  the  fourth  behind  the 
third  in  the  rear  rank.  All  the  others  will  in  like  manner,  place  themselves, 
alternately,  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on 
the  left  of  those  already  formed. 

367.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitually  executed  by  the 
right  of  companies;  but  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them  executed 
by  the  left,  he  will  face  the  company  about,  and  post  the  guides  in  the  rear 
rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles  as  by  the  front  rank;  the  movement  commen- 
cing with  the  left  file,  now  become  the  right,  and  in  each  file  by  the  rear  rank 
man,  now  become  the  front ;  the  left  guide  will  conform  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face  the  company  to  its 
proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either  of  the  formations  above^ 
described,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  and  will  then  give  the  commands  just  prescribed  for  the  instructor. 
Each  company  will  execute  the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and  reciprocally,  at  a  halt , 
and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
form  part  of  a  column  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  four  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Company  left — FACE. 
3.  March  for  double  quick— March. 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  remain  faced  to  the  front, 
the  company  will  face  to  the  left :  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one 
pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will 
form  into  four  ranks  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men  will  reface  to  the 
front  without  undoubling.  All  the  other  files  of  four  will  step  otr,  and  closing 
successively  to  about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  halt,  and  imme- 
diately face  to  the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY LESSON    VI.  75 


374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line  of  battle,  at  two 
paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  wijl  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  tbe  instructor  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.   Company  ri<*ht — Face. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick— March,  j 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand  fast,  the  company 
will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step  off  and  march  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off 
at  the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast:  the  second  file  will  step  off 
when  there  shall  be  between  it  and  the  first  space  sufficient  to  form  it  into 
two  r.uiks.  The  following  files  will  execute  successively  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last  file  shall  have  its  distance,  the 
instructor  will  command: 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.     3.     Front. 

£I379-  ,At  tno  command  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front,  and  the 
files  will  uudouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  marching  to  the  front, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he   will  command: 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  left,  double  files, 

,3.  March  {or double  guick— March.) 

381 .  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the  company 
will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front :  the  company  will  make  a  half 
fi«X3  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves  behind  the  even  numbers. 
Ihe  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit 
the  odd  numbers  ef  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them  and  the  even  numbers 
Ot  that  rank.  The  files  thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  con- 
tinue to  march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so  as  to  keep  con- 
stantly abreast  of  tin-  guide ;  each  file  will  close  successively  on  the  file  next  on 
its  le  f  and  when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face  to  the  front 
hy  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

«W.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in  four  ranks,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  :' 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  the  right,  undouble  files.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the  company 
will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  the  company  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely,  lengthening  the  step  a  little,  in  order  to 
keep,  as  near  as  possible,  abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second  file 
Irom  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval  necessarv  for  the  left 
file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the  second  file  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face 
to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  file  will  immediately  form  into 
two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will  execute 
successively,  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left,  and 


76  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks  when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  obliqued 
the  required  distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  n  column,  left  in  front, 
these  different  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right . 

END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 
General  Principles  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  subjected  to  such  rules  as  will 
give  to  the  commander  the  means  of  moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the 
greatest  promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be  executed  with  the 
same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would 
materially  interfere  with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way  for,  and  to  protect 
the  advance  of,  the  main  corps, .  their  movements  should  be  so  regulated  by 
this  corps,  as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  reserve,  the  strength  and  com- 
position of  which  will  vary  according  to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  distance  of  the  main  corps, 
a  very  small  reserve  will  be  sufficient  for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall 
be  to  fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  cartridges,  relieve  the  fatigued, 
and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  besides  the  company 
reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  required,  composed  of  entire  companies, 
which  will  be  employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the  line  as  may 
be  warmly  attacked  ;  this  reserve  should  be  strong  enough  to  relieve  at  least 
half  the  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserves  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the  line  of  skir- 
mishers, the  company  reserves  at  one  hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  re- 
serve at  four  hundred  paces.  This  rule,  however,  is  not  invariable.  The 
reserves,  while  holding  themselves  within  sustaining  distance  of  the  line, 
should  be,  as  much  as  possible,  in  position  to  afford  each  other  mutual  protec- 
tion, and  must  carefully  profit  by  any  accidents  of  the  ground  to  conceal  them- 
selves from  the  view  of*  the  enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time.     The  run  will  be  resorted  to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  most 
convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by  the  sounds  of  the 
bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commissioned  officers,  will  re- 
peat, and  cause  the  commands  to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given ;  but 
to  avoid  mistakes;  when  the  signals  are  employed,  they  will  wait  until  the  last 
bugle  note  is  sounded  before  commencing  the  movement. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  77 


12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  rapidly,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  will  see  that  the  men  economise  their  strength,  keep 
cool,  and  profit  by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground  may  offer  tor  cover. 
It  is  only  by  this  continual  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all  grades,  that  a  line 
of  skirmishers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five  articles,  and  subdivided  as  fol 
lows. 

Article  First. 

1.  To  deplov  forward. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

3.  To  extend  intervals. 

4.  To  close  intervals. 

5.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 

Article  Second. 

1.  To  advance  inline. 

2.  To  retreat  in  line. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Article  Third. 

1.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

2.  To  fire  marching. 

Article  Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 

3.  The  assembly 

Article  Fifth. 

1.  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the  movements  are  exe- 
cuted by  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the 
battalion  in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed  that  each  com- 
pany of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  of  one 
hundred  paces.  From  these  two  examples,  rules  may  be  deduced  for  all  cases, 
whatever  may  be  the  numerical  strength  of  the  skirmishers,  and  the  extent  of 
ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 

Article  Ferst. 

Deployments. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in  two  ways ;  forward, 
and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when  the  company  is  behind 
the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  established  as  skirmishers  :  it  will  be  deployed  by 
the  flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 


78  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  it  will  be  di- 
vided into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections  5 
the  comrades  in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  be  careful  to  kuow 
and  to  sustain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure  himself  that  the  files  in 
the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  section  are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on  its  right,  left,  or  centre 
file,  or  on  any  other  named  file  whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may 
be  thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on  any  ground  they  may 
be  required  to  occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve  their  alignment,  but 
no  advantages  which  the  ground  may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain 
this  regularity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on  the  extent  of  ground  to 
be  covered ;  but  in  general,  it  is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should 
be  removed  more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The  habitual  distance 
between  men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds  will  be  five  paces;  in  no  case 
will  they  lose  sight  of  each  other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion,  comprehends  its  front  and 
the  half  of  each  interval  which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right 
and  left.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported,  should  be  covered  by 
skirmishers,  it  will  be  necessary  either  to  protect  the  flanks  with  skirmishers, 
or  to  extend  them  in  front  of  the  line  so  far  beyond  the  wings  as  effectually 
to  oppose  any  attempt  which  might  be  made  by  the  enemy's  skirmishers  to 
disturb  the  flanks. 

To  deploy  foricard. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when  the  captain  shall  wish  to 
deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  pla- 
toon in  reserve,  he  will  command: 

1.  First  platoon —as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — MarchJ 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  them- 
selves rapidly  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of 
the  first  platoon;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between  the*  two  sections  in  the 
front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement  begins;  the  fourth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can 
pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  sergeant  the  point  on  which  he  wishes 
him  to  direct  his  march.  The  first  lieutenant,  placing  himself  before  the  cen- 
tre of  the  second  platoon,  will  command : 

Second  platoon  backicard — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step  three  paces  to  the  rear, 
so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of  the  first  platoon  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its 
chief,  and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left,  and  the  third  ser- 
geant on  the  right  flank  of  this  platoon. 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four  men,  conducted  by  the 
fourth  sergeant,  will  direct  itself  on  the  point  indicated  ;  all  the  other  groups 
of  fours  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will  move  diagonally  to 
the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty 
paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance  between  each  group  and  that  immediately 
on'its  left.    When  the  second  group  from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with 


'jlffpmiw*i$# 


**»aaaaa«a    a    b  a  *  *  •  s 


ii     'H     t 


« 
u 


y 


H     M      i*      ti**t 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  79 


and  twenty  paces  from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to  the  front,  conform- 
ing to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the  firat,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same  align- 
ment and  at  twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others,  will 
conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second  ;  they  will  arrive  suc- 
cessively on  the  line.     The  right  guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  line  should 
rest,  the  captain  will  command  the  skirmishers  to  halt ;  the  men  composing 
each  group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  file  in  each  group. 
the  rear  rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of  their  file  leaders.  If  any 
groups  be  not  in  lino  at  the  command  halt,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conform 
ing  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

87.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be  fired  upon  by  the  enemy, 
the  captain  may  cause  the  groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their  proper 

dist.i  I ; 

28.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned  officers  on  the  right,  left 
and  centre  of  the  platoon  will  place  themselves  ton  paces  in  rear  of  the  line, 
and  opposite  the  positions  they  respectively  occupied.  The  chiefs  of  sections 
will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities,  and  then  place  themselves  twenty-five 
or  thirty  ]>aces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  each  having  with  him 
four  men  taken  from  the  reserve,  and  also  a  bugler,  who  will  repeat,  if  I 
sary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29,  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed  to  take  advantage  of  any 
cover  which  the  ground  umyolf-r.  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever 
such  a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  tire  of  the  enemy.  Regu- 
larity in  the  alignment  should  yield  to  this  important  advantage. 

80.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant  will  face  the  second 
platoon  about,  and  march  it  promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  hold  it  at 
ways  at  this  distance,  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

SI.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  movements  of  the  line.  This 
rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually  in  the  scabbard,  and 
this  rule  applies  equally  to  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve;  whenever  bay- 
onets are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  be  given.  The  captain 
will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  whole  deployment,  and  then  promptly 
place  himself  about  eighty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  have 
with  him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve. 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or  the  centre  of  the  platoon. 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  right  or  centre,  for  that  of 
left  file. 

34.  The  deployment  on' the  right  or  the  centre  will  be  made  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  above  ;  in  this  latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon 
will  be  marked  by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  section ;  the  fifth  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide  of 
the  platoon  during  the  deployment, 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made,  on  the  right,  left,  or 
centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of  fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from 
each  other,  and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file.  The  de- 
ployments will  habitually  be  made  at  twenty  paces  interval;  but  if  a  greater 
interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indicated  in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so  near  the  main  body  as 
to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the 
same  manner,  and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the  deployment  of  a 
platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third  lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth  section, 
and  a  non-commissioned  officer  designated  for  that  purpose,  the  second  sec- 
tion ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as  centre  guide ;  the  file  closers  will  place 
themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of 
battle.    The  first  and  second  lieutenant  will  each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 


80  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRiMlSHERS. 


To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it 
by  the  flank,  holding  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command: 

] .  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.  By  the  right  flank — take  intervals.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

38.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  them- 
selves, respectively,  two  paces  behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  sec- 
tions of  the  second  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon ;  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he 
can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon. 
The  captain  will  indicate  to  him  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct 
his  march.  The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant  will 
remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  place  them- 
selves two  paces  behind  the  left  group  of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will  fece  to  the  right,  and 
commence  the  movement;  the  left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  de- 
ploy as  soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed No.  26  ;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right 
group,  to  conduct  it ;  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  one 
on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty  paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the 
right  As  the  groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  deploy  as  has  been 
"explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  attention  to  the  successive 
deployments  of  the  groups,  keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to 
rectify  any  errors  which  may  be  committed.  When  the  deployment  is  com- 
pleted, they  will  place  themselves  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their 
sections,  as  has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non-commissioned  officers 
will  also  place  themselves  as  previously  indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon, 
causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  according  to  the  same 
principles,  substituting  left  flank  for  right  flank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  company  upon  the  centre  of 
one  of  the  platoons,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.  By  the  right  and  left  flanks — take  inter- 
vals.   3.  March  ('or  double  quick — March  J 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  38. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  lieutenant  will  place  himself  behind 
the  left  group  of  the  right  section  of  the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant 
behind  the  right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will  face  to  the  right,  the  left 
section  will  face  to  the  left,  the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will 
stand  fast.  The  two  sections  will  move  off*  in  opposite  directions  :  the  third 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  file  to  conduct  it,  the  second 
sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  left  file.  The  two  groups  nearest  that  which 
stands  fast,  will  each  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the 
other  groups  will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear  of  it. 
Each  group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  prescribed  No.  40. 


TTTT 


*U 


a  a  « 

c 

c            > 
•  •     wmop 

■ 

y 

""■ 

/dv- 


£2£ 


-<--<-> 


s  a 


. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  81 


48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the  movement,  holding  them- 
selves always  abreast  of  the  group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be  made  on  any  named  group 
whatsoever;  in  this  case,  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group 
indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be  made  accordiug  to  the  principles  hereto- 
fore prescribed 

50.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed,  according  to  the  same 
principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  exteud  a  line  of  skirmishers, 
will  hi1  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 

52.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a  halt,  and  that  the 
captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to  the  left,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals.     2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March).  * 

53.  At  the  command  march,  the  group  on  the  right  will  stand  fast,  all 
the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  interval 
to  the  prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated  No.  40. 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  preserve  between  each 
other  the  distance  of  five  paces,  unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render 
it  necessary  that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in  sight  of  each 
other.  The  intervals  refer  to  the  spaces  between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the 
distances  between  the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals  will  be  taken  from 
the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neighboring  group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front,  and  the  captain 
should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.  On  the  left  group   (so  many  paces)  extend  intervals.     2.  March  (or  double- 
quick — March). 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  continue  to  march  on  the 
point  of  direction;  the  other  groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and 
taking  the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals  to  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance, by  the  means  indicated  No.  25,  conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the  line,  according  to  the 
same  principles. 

58.  If  iu  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one  company  or  platoon 
should  occupy  a  line  which  had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of 
the  company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  successively  to  the  rear  as 
they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals,  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to 
close  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (so  many  paces)  close  intervals.     2.  MARCH  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

61.  At  the  command  march',  the  left  group  will  stand  fast,  the  other  groups 


82  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to 
the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.   On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  close  intervals.     2.  MARCH  (or  double 
quick — March). 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  continue  to  move  on  in 
the  direction  previously  indicated  ;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right 
shoulder,  will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to  the  prescrib- 
ed distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the  centre,  according  to 
the  same  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to  reinforce  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers, so  as  to  cause  two  companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  pre- 
viously occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so  as  to  finish  its  move- 
ment at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will  suc- 
cessively move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be  unmasked  by  the  men  of  the 
old  company.  The  reserves  of  the  two  companies  will  unite  behind  the  centre 
of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  relieved,  the  captain  will  be 
advised  of  the  intention,  which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first 
and  second  lieutenants.  # 

67  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment  forward,  so  as  to  finish 
the  moveo>ent  at  about  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new  company,  by  command  of 
their  captain,  will  advance  rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt ; 
the  new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will  assemble  on  its  reserve, 
taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the 
enemy. 

69.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching  in  retreat,  the  company 
thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed  No.  38  and 
following.  The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order,  and  having 
passed  the  new  line,  they  will  form  upon  the  reserve. 

Article  Second. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  marching  by 
the  front,  the  guide  will  be  habitually  in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication 
to  this  effect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on  the  contrary  it  be 
intended  that  the  directing  guide  should  be  on  the  right,  or  left,  the  command 
guide  right  or  guide  left,  will  be  given  immediately  after  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  ciptain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to  advance,  will  command : 

1.     Forward.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest  rapidity  by  the  chiefs 
of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  by  the  sergeants."  This  rule  is  general,  wheth- 
er the  skirmishers  march  by  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  83 


73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move  briskly  on  the  line, 
the  first  on  the  right,  the  second  on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the 'centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  move  to  the  front,  the  guide 
charged  with  the  direction  will  move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skir- 
mishers will  hold  themselves  aligued  on  this  guide,  and  preserve  their  inter- 
vals towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately  behind  their  sections,  so 
as  to  direct  their  movements. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he  will  command: 

Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt.  The  chiefs  of 
sections  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularity  in  the  alignments  and  intervals, 
and  after  taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the  ground  may  offer  for  pro- 
tecting the  men,  they,  with  three  sergeants  in  the  line,  will  retire  to  their 
proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers  in  retreat,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  In  retreat.     2    March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  move  on  the  line  as 
prescribed  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will  face  about  individually, 
and  march  to  the  rear,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion  to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt,  and  immediately  face  to 
the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides  will  each  conform  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  78. 

To   change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  ichcel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick— March.) 

87.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  right  guide  will  mark  time  in  his  place  ; 
the  left  guide  will  move  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  that  he  may  properly  re- 
gulate his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his  eyes  to  the  right,  so  as  to  ob- 
serve the  direction  of  the  line,  and  the  nature  oV  the  ground  to  be  passed 
over.  The  centre  guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  in  order 
to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general  direction,  will  take  care  that  his 
steps  are    only   half  the  length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their  steps  by  their  dis- 
tance from  the  marching  flank,  being  less  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and 
greater  as  they  are  removed  from  it ;  they  will  often  look  to  the  marching 
flank,  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  intervals. 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to  resume  the  direct  march, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Fortcard.     2.  March. 


S4  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to  wheel,  and  the  skirmish- 
ers will  move  direct  to  the  front;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point 
which  will  be  indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place  of  moving  it  to  the 
front,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will  change  direction  by  the 
same  means,  and  by  the  same  commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance  ;  for 
example,  if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left,  now  become  the  right, 
he  will  command:  1.  Left  wheel.  2.  March.  At  the  command  halt,  the 
skirmishers  will  face  to  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain  should  wish  to  continue 
to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficient- 
ly, command : 

1.  In  retreat. 

2.  March. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

96.  The  captain  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  march  by  the  right  flank,  will 
command  : 

1.  By  the  right  flank. 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  place  themselves  on  the 
line. 

98.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right  and 
move  off;  the  right  guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on 
the  right  to  conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  indicated;  each  skirmish- 
er will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  one  immediately 
preceding  him,  and  to  preserve  his  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left  flank,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right;  the 
left  guide  will  place  "himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  conduct  him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should 
wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and  face  to  the  enemy. 
The  officers  and  sergeants  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of  the  line,  and  be 
held  always  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position 
to  second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he 
will  command  :  1.  Platoon  forward.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  :  1.  In  retreat.  2.  March.  3. 
Guide  fight.     At  the  command  halt,  it  will  re-face  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that  the  signals  or  commands, 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  85 

such  as  forward,  mean  that  the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy;  in  re- 
treat, that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  flank,  that  the  men  must 
face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  captain  should 
wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right  (or  left),  he  will  command:  1.  By  file 
right  (or  left).  2.  March.  These  movements  will  also  be  executed  by  the 
signals  Nos.  14  and  15. 

Article  Third. 

The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  captain  will  command: 

Commence  —Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of  the  front  rank  will 
commence  firing \  they  will  reload  rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness 

to  fire  again.  Daring  this  time  the  m  m  of  the  rear  rank  will  com  •  to  a  ready, 
and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  also  fin*  and 
reload.  The  men  of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this 
principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other  shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim  with  accuracy ;  they 
should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  between  them- 
selves and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  t •»  deliver  their  fire  with 
the  greater  certainty  of  sue 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place  whilst  reloading,  un- 
less protected  by  accidents  in  the  ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  as  the  fire  at  a 
halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing,  if  the  line  be  advancing,  the  front 
rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  fire,  and  reload  b  fore  throwing  himself  for- 
ward. The  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  after 
passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a 
ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire  whe  '  his  front  rank  man  has  loaded  ;  the  fire 
will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by  each  file  ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep 
united,  and  endeavor,  as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general  direction  of 
the  alignment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command  commence  firing, 
the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  face  to  the  enemy,  fire,  and  then  re- 
load whilst  moving  to  the  rear;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  con- 
tinue to  inarch? an  I  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  fice 
about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  tire,  when  his  front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in 
retreat  and  loaded;  after  which,  he  will  move  to  the  rear  and  re-load  ;  the 
front  rank  man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will  halt  at  ten 
or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  piece  aud  fire, 
conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  firing  will  thus  be  con- 
tinued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  at  the  command, 
commence  firings  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  lace  to  the  enemy,  step 
one  pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue  to  move 


86  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


forward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  fired,  he  will  place  himself 
briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  reload  whilst  marching.     When  he  has 

loaded,  the  rear  rank  man  will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pare  forward,  halt,  and 
fire,  and  returning  to  the  ranks,  will  place  himself  behind  his  front  rank  man  ; 
the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same  manner,  observing  the  same  princi- 
ples. At  the  command  cease  firing,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  retake 
their  original  position,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  fire  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles,  but  in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear 
rank  man  who  will  fire  first. 

116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the  cases  to  which  they 
apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the 
command,  Foricard — March,  it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded , 
without  regard  to  the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong,  who  will  move  to 
the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces  have  been  discharged,  will  remain  in  their 
places  to  load  them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will  be  continued 
agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  whilst  marching 
by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  In  retreat — March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are 
loaded  will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in  this  position  ;  the  men 
whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  loading  them,  and  the  fire  will  be 
continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or  in 
retreat,  at  the  command,  By  the  right  (or  left)  flank — March,  the  men  whose 
pieces  are  loaded  will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  alignment,  face  to  the 
enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position  ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face 
to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The  men  who 
stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  themselves,  immediately  after  firing,  upon 
the  general  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men,  as  the  ease 
may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No, 
114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their  pieces  whilst  marching  ; 
but  they  will  be  enjoined  to  halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charg- 
ing cartridge,  and  priming. 

121.  They  should  be  practiced  to  fire  and  load  kneeling,  lying  down,  and 
sitting,  and  much  liberty  should  be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that 
they  may  be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient.  Skir- 
mishers should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in  whatever  position  they  may 
load,  it  is  important  that  the  piece  should  be  placed  upright  before  ramming, 
in  order  that  the  entire  charge  of  powder  may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same  rank  should  not  all  fire 
at  once,  and  the  men  of  the  same  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the 
other  of  them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skirmishers  should  seize  on 
every  advantage  which  the  ground  may  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  as 
long  as  possible. 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain  will  see  that  the  order  is 
promptly  obeyed  ;  but  the  men  who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line 
be  marching,  it  will  continue  the  movement ;  but  the  man  of  each  file  who 
happens  to  be  in  front,  will  wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall  %e  abreast  with 
him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at  the  command  halt,  the 
line  will  re-form  upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  front ;  when  the  line  is  re- 
treating, upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possible  vigilance  over  a  line 
of  skirmishers;  in  battle,  they  should  neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece. 
In  all  the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see  that  order  and  si- 
lence are  preserved,  and  that  the  skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently ; 


- 


**  *  »«,««» " «  - 


v  a  a  m  *■  *  fc  a  b  j  * 


*i?Jf«*    " 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  87 


they  should  especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and  collected;  not  to  fire  un- 
til they  distinctly  perceive  the  objicts  at  which  they  aim,  and  are  Bare  thai 
those  objects  are  within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should  take  advantage 
promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all  shelter,  and  of  all  accidents  of  the 
ground,  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  protect 
themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may  often  happen,  that  intervals  are  momenta- 
rily lost  when  several  men  near  each  other  find  a  common  shelter;  but  when 
they  quit  this  position,  they  should  immediately  resume  their  intervals  and 
their  places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not,  by  crowding,  needlessly  expose 
themselves  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

Article  Fourth. 

the  rally. 

To  form  column. 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in  order  to  oppose  the 
enemy  with  better  success  ;  the  rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets 
fixed;  when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix  bayonets  without  command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which  the  chief  of  the  line  will 
adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely  disturbed  by  scattered 
horsemen,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  bat  the  captain 
will  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should,  however,  advance  to 
charge  the  skirmishers,  the  captain  will  command,  rally  by  fours.  The  line 
will  halt  if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each  group  will  execute  this  nlly 
in  the  following  manner:  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will 
take  the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  odd  num- 
bered file  will  also  take  the  position  of  "uartl  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back 
to  him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from* the  right  foot  of  the  former,  and  par- 
allel to  it;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the 
even  file,  will  also  place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and 
between  the  two  men  already  established,  facing  to  the  right  and  left ;  the 
right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be  brought  together,  forming  a  square,  and  ser- 
ving for  mutual  support.  The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  a  ready, 
fire  as  occasion  may  oiler,  and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

130  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each  cause  the  four  men  who 
constitute  his  guard  to  form  square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him 
and  the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three  sergeants  will 
each  promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  nearest  him  in  the  line  of  skirmish- 
ers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares  too  weak,  but  should 
wish  to  hold  his  position  by  strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command: 

Rally  by  sections. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  move  rapidly  on  the  cen- 
tre group  of  their  respective  sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose 
position  might  offer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  advantage;  the  skirmishers 
will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this  group,  and  without  distinction  of  numbers. 
The  men  composing  the  group  on  which  the  formation  is  made,  will  immedi- 
ately form  square,  as  heretofore  explained,  and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayo- 
nets uppermost,  in  order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which  the  rally  is  to  be  made. 
The  other  skirmishers,  as  they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open  angular 
spaces  between  these  four  men,  and  successively  rally  around  this  first  nu- 
cleus, and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  The  skirmish- 
ers will  take  as  they  arrive,  the  position  of  charge  bayonet,  the  point  of  the 


88  IXSTRUCT10N    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 


bayonet  more  elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  position.  The  move- 
ment concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will  fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and 
load  without  moving  their  feet. 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard,  wherever  he  may  judge 
his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to  observe  that  the  rally 
is  made  in  silence,  and  with  promptitude  and  order  ;  that  some  pieces  in  each 
of  their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is-  directed  on 
those  points  only  where  it  will  be  most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will  form  into  a  circle  around 
its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers  formed  of  many 
platoons,  should  judge  that  the  rally  by  section  does  not  offer  sufficient  resist- 
ance, he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and  for  this  purpose, 
will  command : 

Rally  by  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  the  same  means,  as  the  rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will 
command : 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly  on  the  reserve;  the 
officer  who  commands  it  will  take  immediate  steps  to  form  square  :  for  this 
purpose,  he  will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be  thrown  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear  ;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the  run,  will  form  rapidly  in- 
to groups,  and  upon  that  man  of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the 
section.  These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards  each  other, 
and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into  sections  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity 
while  moving  to  the  rear ;  the  officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that  this  for- 
mation is  made  in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs  will  direct  their  sections 
upon  the  reserve,  taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  As  the  skir- 
mishers arrive,  they  will  continue  and  complete  the  formation  of  the  square 
begun  by  the  reserve,  closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regard  to 
their  places  in  line ;  they  will  come  to  a  ready  without  command,  and  fire 
upon  the  enemy  ;  which  will  also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  un- 
masked by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavalry  while  retreating,  its 
chief  will  command  halt;  at  this  command,  the  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a 
compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form  his  section  and  resume  the 
march,  the  moment  he  can  do  so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and  efficient  manner,  re- 
quires coolness  and  activity  on  the  part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of  respite  which  the 
enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him ;  as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place 
himself  beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a  position  where 
he  may  defend  himself  with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to  the  corps  to  which 
he  belongs.  For  this  purpose,  being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to 
break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half  distance  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.    2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will  dress  on  its  centre,  and  the 
platoon  which  was  facing  to  the  rear  will  face  about  without  command.      The 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  89 


guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  respective  platoons, 
those  of  the  second  platoon  w[]\  place  themselves  at  half  distance   from  those 
of  the  first,  counting  from  the  rear  rank.     These  dispositions  being  made,  the 
captain  can  move  the  column  in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 
J 45.     If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  immediately  face  by  the  rear 
rank,  and  move  off  in  the  opposite  direction.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  in  mo- 
tion, the  captain  will  command  : 

3.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide  ;  the  guides  will 
march  at  their  proper  distances,  and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavalry,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt;  the  fir.»t  platoon  will 
face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer  half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  80  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the 
square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities 
which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  advance,  the  captain  will 
command : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Xo.  144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March  (or  double  quick— March).     3.   Guide  left  for  right). 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move  forward,  and  at  the 
third  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain  ground  to  the  right  or 
left,  he  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  this 
purpose,    will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may  be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at  half  distance,  ri^ht  in  front, 
fhe  captain  can  deploy  the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already 
explained  ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  forward 
on  the  centre  file, leaving  the  first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.     2.   On  the  centre  file — take   intervals.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March,). 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  caution  his 
platoon  to  stand  fast :  the  chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  section,  second  platoon, 
will  command:  Section  right  face;  the  chief  of  the  left  section:  Section  left 
face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will  move  off  briskly  in  opposite 
directions,  and  having  unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 


!>0  INSTRUCTION    FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flank — March,  and  By  the  right  flank — 
March  ;  and  as  soon  as  these  sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first  pla- 
toon, they  will  command,  As  skirmishers — MARCH.  The  groups  will  then  de- 
ploy according  to  prescribed  principles,  on  the  right  group  of  the  left  section, 
which  will  he  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the  point  indicated. 

159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment  made  by  the  flank,  the 
second  platoon  will  be  moved  to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated,  and  halt- 
ed alter- [Kissing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon;  the  de- 
ployment will  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skirmishers,  and  the  cap- 
tain should  wish  to  rally  them  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

161.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve,  no  matter  what 
position  the  company  to  which  they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will 
rapidly  unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing  themselves  in  a  run  to- 
wards its  nearest  flank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

1 62.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passsed  beyond  the  line  of  file  closers, 
the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will 
re-form  his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing  on  which  it  is 
rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file  closers.  These  subdivisions 
will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of  the  commander  of  the  battalion,  who  may, 
if  he  thinks  proper,  throw  them  into  line  of  battle  at  the  extremities  of  the  line, 
or  in  the  intervals  between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind  the  same  wing  of  a  bat- 
talion, or  behind  any  shelter  whatsoever,  they  should  be  formed  always  into 
(dose  column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company  of  skirmishers,  shall  be 
formed  into  square,  the  platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering  company  will 
be  directed  by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at 
the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then  formed  into  close  col- 
u m  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  frrst  front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of  the  square  from  being 
opened,  the  skirmishers  will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank 
men,  the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  resting  on  the  thigh, 
the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may  also  place  themselves 
about  the  angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service  by  defending  the  sectors 
without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the    skirmishers  are  rallied   be   in  column 
ready  to  form  square,   the  skirmishers  will   be  formed  into  close  column  by 
platoon,  in  rear  of  the  centre   of  the  third   division,   and  at  the   command,* 
Form  square — March,  they  will  move  forward  and  close  on  the  buglers. 

167.  .When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon  or  section  behind  the 
wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be  wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  tront,  they 
will  be  marched  by  the  flank  towards  the  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  be  then 
deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  phced  in  the  interior  of  squares  or  col- 
umns, are  to  be  deployed,  they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then 
thrown  forward,  as  is  prescribed,  No.  157 ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  have  un- 
masked the  column  or  square,  they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  on  the  right,  the 
other  on  the  left  file. 

The  assembly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  assembled  when  there  is 
no  longer  danger  of  its  being  disturbed  ;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually 
in  quick  time. 


: 


III 


k 


pi  B* 


'  * 

i 


Mi  11 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  91 


170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  on  the  reserve,  will 
command : 

Assembh  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assemble  by  groups  of  fours  ; 
the  front  rank  men  will  place  themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men  :  and 
each  group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each  will  take  its 
proper  place  in  the  ranks.  When  the  company  is  re-formed,  it  will  rejoin  the 
battalion  t«»  which  it  belongs. 

17-2  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  on  the  centre,  or 
on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line,  either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them  on  the  centre  while 
marching,  he  will  command: 

Assemble  on  the  centre. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continue  to  march  directly  to 
the  front  on  the  point  indicated;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  tile  will 
follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank  man;  the  other  two  com- 
rades of  this  group,  and  likewise  those  of  their  left,  will  inarch  diagonally, 
advancing  the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait,  so  as  t<>  re-form  the 
groups  while  drawing  nearer  and  nearer  the  directing  rile:  the  men  of  the 
right  section  will  unite  in  the  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then  upon  the 
directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right  shoulder.  As  they  successively 
unite  on  the  centre,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  he  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles. 

l?b\  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat  will  also  be  executed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their  rear 
rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt,  and  on  the  line  they 
occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the  same  commands;  the  skirmishers  will  face 
to  the  right  or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right  or  left  flank, 
re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and  thus  arrive  on  the  hie  which  served 
as  the  point  of  formation.  As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers  will 
support  arms. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  and  to  rally  this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  commander  should  wish  to 
deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companies 
in  reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant, 
and  also  to  the  major,  who  will  be  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve. 
He  will  point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonej  the  direction  he  wishes  t<»  give  the 
line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  to 
rest,  and  to  the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish  it  estab- 
lished. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  and  the  adjutant  in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company. 
The  commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the  manner  to  be  herein- 
after indicated. 


92  INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  prepare  to  deploy  the  first  platoons  of  their  respective  companies,  the 
sixth  on  its  right,  the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face  it  to  the  right,  and  the 
captains  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective  com- 
panies to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  movement  will  commence.  The  platoons 
of  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  deploy. fo rward  ;  the  right  guide  of  the 
sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel. 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right,  and  also  the  companies 
which  have  faced  to  the  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  com- 
pany will  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from  the  left  of  the 
fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on  its  left  file.  The  seventh 
and  eighth  companies  will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  count- 
ing from  the  first  file  of  the  company,  which  is  immediately  on  its  right;  and 
the  chiefs  of  these  companies  will  afterwards  deploy  their  first  platoons  on 
the  right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the  deployment  is  made, 
should  be  careful  to  direct  themselves  towards  the  outer  man  of  the  neighbor- 
ing company,  already  deployed  as  skirmishers ;  or  if  the  company  has  not 
tiuished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge  carefully  the  distance  which  may  still 
be  required  to  place  all  these  files  in  line,  and  will  then  march  on  the  point 
thus  marked  out.  The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  them- 
selves on  those  already  deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow  the  deployment,  the 
one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will 
place  themselves  near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  established  in  echellon  in  the 
following  manner  :  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company  ;  the  reserves  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  companies,  united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of  skir- 
mishers, and  thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company;  the 
reserves  of  the  seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also  united,  opposite  the  centre 
of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  further  to  the  rear  than  the  re- 
serve of  the  sixth  company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  composing  the  reserve,  on  re- 
ceiving an  order  from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them  into  column  by  company,  at 
half  distance ;  after  which  he  will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point  which 
shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintendence  of  the  movement ; 
and  when  it  is  finished,  will  move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his 
view  may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to  direct  their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired  to  deploy  by  the  flank, 
the  sixth  and  fifth  companies  will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve 
paces,  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the 
left  file,  by  the  means  already  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will 
be  marched  by  the  flank  ;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file  of  the  company,  next  to- 
wards the  direction,  shall  have  taken  its  interval,  it  will  be  moved  upon  the 
line  established  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies,  halted,  and  deployed. 


INSTRUCTION    FOR    SKIRMISHERS.  93 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  ft  has  been  supposed  that  the  battalion 
was  in  order  of  battle ;  but  if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers 
by  the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward,  the  directing  company,  as 
soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be  moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head 
of  the  column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of  the 
other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  .or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon 
as  it  is  taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank,  the  directing  company 
will  be  moved  in  the  same  maimer  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and 
will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of 
the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and  when  its  interval  is 
taken,  will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and  deployed  as  soon  as  the  company 
next  towards  the  direction  shall  have  finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  reserves  in  echellon,  in  order  that 
they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  rally,  be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injur- 
ing each  other;  and  the  reserves  of  the  two  contiguous  companies  have  been 
united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number  of  the  echellons,  and  to  increase  their 
capacity  for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend  from  right  to  left,  but 
they  may,  on  an  indication  from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the 
same  principle,  so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  color, 
without  its  guard,  will  be  detached,  and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  movements  prescribed  for  a 
company  to  be  executed  by  the  battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and  the 
same  signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will  cause  the  rally 
on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect  this 
movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  rallied  in  squares  on 
their  respective  reserves;  each  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form 
the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections  on  the  flanks  ; 
the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last 
the  fourth  front.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  superintend  the  rally,  and  as 
fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they  will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to 
height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of  squares  will  profit  by 
any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either 
by  marching  upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an  advantageous  posi- 
tion ;  to  this  end,  each  of  the  squares  will  be.  formed  into  column,  and  march 
in  this  order;  and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and  again  form  itself  into 
square. 

900.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the  battalion-reserve,  each 
will  re-form  as  promptly  as  possible,  and  without  regard  to  designation  or 
number,  take  place  in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  itself  threatened  by 
cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  companies  in  marching  towards  it  will  place  them- 
selves promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march  on  the  squares. 


.END   OF    INSTRUCTION   FOR   SKIRMISHERS. 


94    M  SWORD    MANUAL,    ETC. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWOED  OR  SABRE,  FOR  OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF  THE   SWORD   OR   SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against 
the  right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

THE  SALUTE  WITH  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  (or  pauses.) 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person  to  be  saluted,  raise  the 
sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to 
the  right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  supported  on 
the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  extending  the  arm,  so  that 
the  right  hand  may  be  brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in 
that  position  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered  shall  be  passed, 
or  shall  have  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  the  back  of  the  blade 
against  the  right  shoulder. 


ft 


COLOR-SALUTE,    ETC.  *      95 


COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  or -in  march,  will  always 
carry  the  heel  of  the  color-lance  supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  gen- 
erally placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to  hold  it  steady. 
When  the  color  has  to  render  honors,  the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows  : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along  the  lance  to  the  height 
of  the  eye  ;  lower  the  lance  hy  straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the 
heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring  hack  the  lance  to  the  habit- 
ual position  when  the  person  saluted  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six 
paces. 


MANUAL. 

FOR   RELIEVING   SENTINELS. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lock  to  the  front,  seize  it 
smartly  at  the  same  instant  with  both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left 
at  the  lower  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the  muzzle,  the  barrel 
sloping  upwards  and  crossing  opposite  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt 
proportionally  lowered.  The  palm  of  the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  thatV* 
of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  which 
the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

{First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right  shoulder,  placing  the 
right  hand  as  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  th*e  height 
of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  side. 

The  men  being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished  to  give  the  men 
rest,  the  command  will  be  : 

Parade— Rest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of  the  butt,  the  barrel  to 
the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  body ;  seize  it  at  the  same 
time  with  the  left  hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the  upper  band ;  carry 
the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the  rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


